JP7572149B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can be controlled to a favorable state for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that is controlled to a state in which a jackpot game can be executed based on the display of seven symbols stopped in a line on a decorative symbol display device.

JP 2014-147575 A

The gaming machine described above is configured to issue a right-hit instruction that prompts the player to shoot the game ball to the right by operating the ball launch handle during the jackpot start performance, but there is still room for improvement in the instructions that prompt the player to shoot the game ball in such a specific direction.

The present invention was conceived in light of this situation, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can optimally execute instructions that prompt the player to launch a gaming ball in a specific direction.

(A) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a launching means capable of launching game media in response to an operation by a player;
a display means for displaying a guide to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area out of the first area and the second area;
a guide light emitting means for illuminating a guide light to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting portion of the light emitting means;
and a state control means capable of controlling the game machine to a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state after the control of the advantageous state is completed.
the guidance indication includes a first guidance indication and a second guidance indication that is emphasized less than the first guidance indication,
The display means is
displaying the second guidance display in a first period during a predetermined period in which a start performance for starting control of the advantageous state is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the normal state, displaying the first guidance display and the second guidance display in a second period during the predetermined period that is after the first period, and in the subsequent period, ending the first guidance display while displaying the second guidance display ;
In the special state after the control of the advantageous state is ended, the second guidance display is performed;
when the start performance is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the special state, the first guidance display is not displayed;
when the start performance is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the normal state, the guidance light-emitting means turns off the light-emitting means and then emits the guidance light when executing the first guidance display ;
in both a first situation in which a power outage occurs during the second period while the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being displayed and the power is restored, and a second situation in which a power outage occurs during the period after the predetermined period while the second guidance display is being displayed and the power is restored, a recovery screen during recovery is displayed and then a post-recovery screen after recovery is displayed;
The second guidance display is performed commonly on the during-restoration screen and the after-restoration screen in the first situation and on the during-restoration screen and the after-restoration screen in the second situation.
It is characterized by:
Furthermore, (1) a gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of first identification information and a variable display of second identification information,
a launching means capable of launching game media into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message using an image to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path along which the game medium can flow down in the game area;
the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means is
during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of a start effect notifying the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, the second guidance display is performed, and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued;
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued;
In a special state after the control of the advantageous state is ended, the second guidance display is continued;
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in association with the control of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-38 (d1) to Fig. 10-39 (d4), a portion that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
moreover,
The game control system includes a state control means capable of controlling to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a portion executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17, and a portion executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (e.g., a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13), and the state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means so that the numerical information corresponds to the special number of times. The numerical value can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met by the numerical value becoming a specific value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 12-17, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173), and the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71).
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, so that the player can be rescued more easily, and the player's motivation to play can be increased.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described below includes the invention relating to the following means A. Conventionally, gaming machines that can be controlled to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, as shown in JP 2005-95449 A, have been known. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that when the number of special game games (number of executions of variable display) executed in a normal gaming state reaches 1000 times (special number of times) but no jackpot (advantageous state) occurs (special condition is established), the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state, the probability that a jackpot is determined as the result of the special game is increased to about 1/100, and a jackpot is more likely to occur in the subsequent special game. Patent Document 1 also describes that when the number of special game games (number of executions of variable display) reaches 1000 times in a normal gaming state but no jackpot occurs, a time-saving state may be generated instead of the high probability state.

However, in conventional gaming machines, there was insufficient consideration given to the interest generated when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a special number, or in the period before and after this.

Therefore, the purpose of this invention is to provide an entertaining gaming machine.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of first identification information and a variable display of second identification information, and includes state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19) that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; The game control means is provided with an update means capable of updating the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a portion executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 12-17, a portion executing step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100). a portion for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173), an updating means for updating the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a portion for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined suggestion effect execution means for executing a predetermined suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect) when the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-49, a portion for executing step 108IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120), and a control means for indicating that control of a special state is started based on the establishment of a special condition. The display device further includes a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, changing the background image as shown in Figures 12-52 (C1) and (C2), blacking out when the fluctuation starts as shown in Figure 12-53 (B), or blacking out when the fluctuation ends as shown in Figure 12-54 (C)) to notify the user of a certain condition (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638 as shown in Figure 12-23), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing predetermined suggestion effects in the period before the special condition is established (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A as shown in Figure 12-44. See Figure 12-50).
According to such a configuration, the special notification effect is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his/her interest.

The invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of this invention, or it may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of this invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine relating to a characteristic portion of this embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame lamp. An explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board and the fourth pattern unit. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning type table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a jackpot. A flowchart showing an example of processing after a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. A flowchart showing an example of a performance processing during a jackpot. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a winning fluctuation. This is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. This is a timing chart showing an example of processing after a jackpot has ended. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a lighting state of a lamp. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table; FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine during play. FIG. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the fanfare presentation due to a special chart 1 hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored from a power outage during one round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds after one round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the second round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between two rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds three rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the 4th round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds four rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored from a power outage during the final round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of a pachinko game machine when power is restored after a power outage during the ending presentation when special chart 1 is hit. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. A front view of a pachinko game machine in characteristic portion 108IW. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the probability of a jackpot and the probability of losing the time-saving function for each setting value. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the probability of a jackpot and the probability of losing the time-saving function for each setting value. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a time-saving type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining types of time saving. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 108IW. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 108IW. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing a game control main processing in characteristic section 108IW. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing. FIG. 11 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in characteristic portion 108IW. A flowchart showing a specific example of the main processing for performance control in characteristic unit 108IW. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting demo performance control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a caption display execution lottery table and a caption mode determination lottery table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode of a caption displayed while waiting for customers. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a pre-reading notice setting process. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a pre-reading preview performance execution decision table, a pre-reading preview performance type decision table, and a pre-reading preview performance mode decision table. This is an explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of each type of preview performance. This is a time chart to explain the period of change between the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue, and the period of execution of the pre-reading preview performance. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a preview performance execution decision table and a preview performance mode decision table. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. This is a timing chart to explain the timing of execution of the presentation when executing a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of the time-saving entry appearance presentation. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of the presentation aspects of false countdown presentations and effect presentations. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process in the first modified example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process in Modification 1. 13 is a flowchart showing the next change postponement process in the first modified example. This is a timing chart to explain the timing of execution of the presentation when executing a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction in variant example 1. An explanatory diagram for explaining variants 2 to 4 of the method of selecting a fluctuation pattern during a time-saving state based on rescue time-saving. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process in Example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process in the second embodiment. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a preview performance execution decision table and a preview performance mode decision table in Example 2. A timing chart for explaining the timing of execution of the presentation when executing a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction in Example 2. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to rescue time reduction in Example 2. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to rescue time reduction in variant example 1 of Example 2. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to rescue time reduction in variant example 2 of Example 2.

<Basic explanation>
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

[Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.]
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include the display of a certain symbol in a flashing manner. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern" or "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern" or "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game. Here, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled vertically or updated) in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in synchronization with the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game. The special pattern games and the variable display of decorative patterns executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that a game ball can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area in a big prize opening) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progress of the performance)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, the operation of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" in which the probability jackpot state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (such as "7") may be displayed in a line and stopped, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" in which the probability jackpot state is not controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (such as "6") may be displayed in a line and stopped. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, other effects, such as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect may be executed that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to show that the value of the big win game state is increasing may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

[Board configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

[Action]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Y), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; N), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, followed by a setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting confirmation state. When the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or if the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt process periodically.

After executing such game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output processing, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as whether or not there is a reach), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as the type of reach presentation), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the hit judgment value range from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the hit judgment value range from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result determination table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit determination values are set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination values regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination values from overlapping with the range of big hit determination values that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when the set value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; N), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to emit an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Y), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on, so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

[Variations of the basic description]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

<Explanation of characteristic part 075F>
Next, the gaming machine according to the characteristic feature 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-60.

[Configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F]
This is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in Fig. 10-1, the pachinko game machine 1 according to this characteristic part 075F is provided with a special variable winning ball device 075F007A instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in Fig. 1. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Fig. 10-4), and forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a normal large winning opening) that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large prize opening door in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and this large prize opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front sides of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the path for the game ball to the normal large prize opening. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large prize opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, closing the normal large prize opening, and the game ball cannot enter (pass) through the normal large prize opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the large prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the normal large prize opening, and making it easier for the game ball to enter the normal large prize opening.

When a gaming ball enters the regular large prize opening, it is detected by the count switch 23 as it passes through an area provided inside the regular large prize opening. When a gaming ball is detected by the count switch 23, a number of gaming balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches an upper limit (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the regular large prize opening is controlled to a closed state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V-variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V-variable winning ball device 075F007B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see Figure 10-4), and forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a V-large winning opening) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B has a large winning port door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning port door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the path for the game ball to the V large winning port. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the off state, the large winning port door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, closing the V large winning port and preventing the game ball from entering (passing through) the V large winning port. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the on state, the large winning port door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the V large winning port and allowing the game ball to enter the V large winning port more easily.

The game ball that enters the V large prize opening is detected by the V prize opening switch 075F024 (see FIG. 10-4) as it passes through a specific area (also called the V prize opening area) provided inside the V large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the V prize opening switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to a high probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V prize occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V large prize opening during a round of the high probability game state, and the game state is controlled to a high probability state. The normal large prize opening and the V large prize opening are collectively referred to as the large prize opening. The large prize opening is also referred to as an attacca.

The pachinko game machine 1 has a number of lamps on the game board 2. Specifically, in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacca lamp 9c provided near the normal large prize opening and the V large prize opening, the pachinko game machine 1 also has an attacca upper lamp 075F009U provided above the attacca, a lower left lamp 075F009D provided at the lower left of the game board 2, a board right lamp 075F009F provided to the right of the image display device 5, and a board left lamp 075F009E provided to the left of the image display device 5.

The movable body lamp 9d illuminates the characters (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example, "XXX") attached to the movable body 32 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is stopped or in operation. The attacca lamp 9c illuminates the vicinity of the attacca by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The attacca upper lamp 075F009U illuminates the vicinity above the attacca by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D illuminates the vicinity of the lower left of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided on a housing imitating a character, and illuminates the housing imitating a character on the right side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The board left lamp 075F009E illuminates the vicinity of the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as an LED. The left board lamp 075F009E may be provided on a character-shaped housing, similar to the right board lamp 075F009F. The right board lamp 075F009F and the left board lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (left/right, up/down, etc.), similar to the movable body lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has multiple lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has frame lamps consisting of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3.

Here, FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing the frame lamps. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of eleven lamps, the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, arranged counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has a group of eleven lamps, the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, arranged clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights up the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example).

The pachinko game machine 1 also has a special symbol LED board 075F020 at the bottom left of the game board 2. The special symbol LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and is a board that plays the roles of the first reserve indicator 25A, the second reserve indicator 25B, the regular reserve indicator 25C, the regular pattern indicator 20, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 1 by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. The pachinko game machine 1 also has a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the bottom left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120, and notifies the changes in the special symbol, the number of reserved symbols, the right-hit display, and the like by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs.

Here, Figure 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 10-3(a), the special chart LED board 075F020 includes a special chart 1 variable display unit 075F021 which indicates the variable display of the first special chart, a special chart 2 variable display unit 075F022 which indicates the variable display of the second special chart, a special chart 1 memory display unit 075F023 which indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special chart game, a special chart 2 memory display unit 075F024 which indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special chart game, a regular chart memory display unit 075F025 which indicates the regular chart reserved memory number, a regular chart display unit 075F026 which indicates the variable display of regular charts, a right hit display unit 075F030 which encourages the player to hit to the right, a special chance display unit 075F028 which indicates whether or not a special chance state is in effect, a time-saving display unit 075F029 which indicates whether or not a time-saving state is in effect, and a round display unit 075F027 which indicates the number of rounds of a jackpot. Each display unit can inform the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special or normal symbols, the results, the current game status, the number of reserved symbols, etc., by lighting or blinking with a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 075F021 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 075F022 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

Furthermore, the special chart LED board 075F020 can prompt the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 075F030. In this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 075F030 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit to the right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit to the left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 075F030 turns off. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns on the right hit display unit 075F030, and after the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, it transmits a right hit display turning off designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right hit display unit 075F030. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 075F030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right-hit display unit 075F030.

Here, right-hand hit refers to operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the second flow-down path, which is one of the first and second flow-down paths through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. The first flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the left area of the game area, and beyond which there is a first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, but there is no second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. The second flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the right area of the game area, and beyond which there are a second start winning hole and a large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows toward the first start winning hole through the first flow-down path. When the player shoots the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball flows through the second flow path toward the second start winning hole or the large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole). In this embodiment, in the big win game after the big win occurs and in the game state after the big win game (time-saving state or probability change state), the player hits the right to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole or the large winning hole provided on the right side of the game area, and during that time, the right hit display unit 075F030 urges the player to hit the right. By hitting the right while the display urging the player to hit the right is being displayed, the player can make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3 balls) are paid out and the right to the second special game can be obtained, or the game ball can enter the normal large winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out. Furthermore, as will be described in more detail later, during a round of a guaranteed jackpot, the V-large winning hole opens, and by hitting the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right, the player can gain the right to enter the game ball into the V-large winning hole and be controlled into a guaranteed jackpot state. Therefore, hitting to the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right can give the player an overall advantage. Note that, unlike hitting to the right, operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hitting style) is also called hitting to the left.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 075F051 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 075F052 that indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a special symbol 1 variable display section 075F053 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 075F054 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a right hit display section 075F055 that encourages the player to hit right. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of a special symbol, the reserved number, and a right hit instruction by lighting/blinking/going out using lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special chart 1 variable display unit 075F053 notifies the player whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopped symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by turning on/flashing/going off a lighting means such as an LED. The special chart 2 variable display unit 075F054 notifies the player whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopped symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by turning on/flashing/going off a lighting means such as an LED. Hereinafter, the display of the change in the stopped symbol of the first special symbol by a lighting means such as an LED in the special chart 1 variable display unit 075F021 is also referred to as the change display of the first special symbol. Also, the display of the change in the stopped symbol of the second special symbol by a lighting means such as an LED in the special chart 2 variable display unit 075F054 is also referred to as the change display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit to the right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit to the left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 turns off. The performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving a right hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined, and turns off the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving a right hit display turning off command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 075F055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right-hit display unit 075F055 based on receiving a jackpot end command from the CPU 103.

Figure 10-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in Figure 10-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L is connected to a lamp control board 14 and can be lit (blinked) by control of the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. Each of these movable body lamps 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L, or these lamps collectively, are also referred to as game effect lamps 9.

The fourth pattern unit 075F050 is connected to the performance control board 12, and each display section can be lit (blinked) under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special chart LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display can be lit (blinked) by the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
10-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 constitutes a second display area 075F005Sa including a first reserved memory display area 075F005D capable of displaying the first reserved memory number by the number of circular reserved displays, and a second reserved memory display area 075F005U capable of displaying the second reserved memory number by the number of circular reserved displays.

The upper right corner of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb that includes a fourth pattern 075F005J, which indicates that a special pattern is being variably displayed, and a display of the first and second reserved memory counts.

In the center of the first display area 075F005F, the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and variable display of the decorative patterns can be performed. In addition, small patterns 075F005M, which are smaller than the decorative patterns, are displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small patterns correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and are arranged vertically. In addition, the small patterns 075F005M are not hidden during variable display, and are always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. For this reason, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 075F005A is provided at the bottom center of the first display area 075F005F for displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as the active display.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Big Win Type)
Fig. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning type table. As shown in Fig. 10-6, the winning type table shows the winning probability after the end of the winning game state, the base after the end of the winning game state, the fluctuation time after the end of the winning game state, and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the winning game for each type of winning in the winning game.

Specifically, the types of jackpots are 5R normal jackpot, 5R sure-win jackpot, and 10R sure-win jackpot. In the following, each round may be indicated by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1st round, and the second round is also called the 2nd round. A 5R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker makes it difficult to win a V (for example, control that shortens the time to open the lid that opens and closes the V big winning port to a specified time or control that does not allow the game ball to enter a specific area by repeatedly opening and closing the lid), and is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In a normal jackpot, this low probability high base state continues until the earlier of the condition that the variable display is executed a specified number of times, 100 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs is met.

A 5R guaranteed jackpot is a jackpot in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) inside the attacker is one that makes it easier to win a V (for example, a control that always keeps the lid that opens and closes the V winning port open, or a control that keeps the lid open for longer than a specific time), and which is controlled to a high probability state and high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In a guaranteed jackpot, this high probability, high base state continues until the earlier of the following conditions is met: the variable display is executed a specified number of times, 150 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

A 10R guaranteed jackpot is a jackpot in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is one that makes it easier to win a V (for example, a control that keeps the lid that opens and closes the V winning port always open, or a control that keeps the lid open for longer than a specific time), and which is controlled to a high probability state and high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In a guaranteed jackpot, this high probability, high base state continues until the earlier of the following conditions is met: the variable display is executed a specified number of times, 150 times, or the next jackpot occurs.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable probability jackpot share the same decorative symbols that stop when the jackpot occurs. In addition, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable probability jackpot share the same presentation style of the fanfare presentation (e.g., background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) that occurs when the jackpot occurs, the presentation style of the round presentation (e.g., background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) that occurs during the round of the jackpot game state, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state are also common. For this reason, it is difficult for a player to recognize whether a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R variable probability jackpot has occurred, as long as they look at the stopped decorative symbols, fanfare presentation, and round presentation. Here, in the case of a 5R variable probability jackpot, the V large prize entry port opens in a specified round (in this embodiment, the 4th round). At this time, if the player can aim at the V-large winning hole and hit the ball to the right to get it into the V-large winning hole, the game state will be controlled to a special state.

As such, 5R normal jackpots and 5R special jackpots are also called chance bonuses because it is difficult for the player to know whether or not a special jackpot has occurred until halfway through the round.

In the case of a 10R special jackpot, the V-large winning hole will open in a specified round (the 9th round in this embodiment) in the same way as in the case of a 5R special jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-large winning hole by hitting it to the right, the game state will be controlled to a special jackpot state. However, in the case of a 10R special jackpot, the decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs, the presentation style of the fanfare presentation (for example, the background, the characters that appear, the sound effects, etc.), and the presentation style of the round presentation that is performed during the round of the jackpot game state are different from those of a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R special jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R special jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that a special jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R special jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 10-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in FIG. 10-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random R is a random counter for hit determination to determine whether or not a hit is made. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is updated by adding from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then is updated by adding from 0 again. Random 1 is a random counter (for determining the type of hit) that determines the type of hit as 5R normal hit, 5R variable hit, or 10R variable hit. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) that determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining the fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for determining the hit of a normal pattern) that determines whether or not a hit based on a normal pattern is generated. Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the initial value of Random 4) that determines the initial value of Random 4.

In this embodiment, whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot determination (Random R). Then, which of the multiple types of jackpots, such as a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R special jackpot, and a 10R special jackpot, that will be the jackpot game state is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot type determination (Random 1). At this time, the jackpot pattern can also be determined based on the value of Random 1.

Furthermore, first, a fluctuation pattern type is determined using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 3), and then one of the fluctuation patterns included in the determined fluctuation pattern type is determined using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 4). Thus, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. A fluctuation pattern type is a grouping of multiple fluctuation patterns according to the characteristics of their fluctuation modes. One or multiple fluctuation patterns belong to a fluctuation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern type accompanied by a normal reach, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type accompanied by a super reach. Such fluctuation pattern types are selected at a predetermined rate. In addition, in the case of a miss, the fluctuation pattern types are classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type that does not involve a reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

These types of fluctuation pattern are set so that when the display result is incorrect, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern type differs between when the time-saving state is in effect and when the time-saving state is not in effect (when the time-saving state is in effect, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time, such as a normal fluctuation pattern type, is selected is set to be higher than when the time-saving state is not in effect), and therefore when the time-saving state is in effect, the fluctuation display time is shorter than when the time-saving state is not in effect.

In addition, such a variation pattern type may be set so that the selection ratio differs when the reserved memory number of each special symbol that performs the variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number and when it is less than the predetermined number, so that when the reserved memory number of each special symbol that performs the variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the reserved number shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time compared to when the reserved number shortening control number is less than the predetermined number. For example, in the reserved number shortening control state, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern type with a short variable display time such as a normal variable pattern type may be set to be higher compared to when the reserved number shortening control state is not in effect, so that the average variable display time is shorter compared to when the reserved number shortening control state is not in effect. In addition, in the reserved number shortening control, the variable display time of the variation pattern type itself may be shortened even when the same variable pattern type is selected compared to when the reserved number shortening control state is not in effect.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern may be determined in a one-step method in which the fluctuation pattern is determined by a single random number drawing, rather than in a two-step method in which the fluctuation pattern type is determined first and then the fluctuation pattern is determined.

(Big hit determination table, big hit type determination table)
10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the big win determination table and the big win type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 10-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in RO101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with random R is set. There are two types of jackpot determination tables: a normal (non-high probability) jackpot determination table used in the normal state (a game state that is not in the high probability state, i.e., a non-high probability state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

The normal jackpot determination table has the numerical values in the left column of FIG. 10-8(A) set as jackpot determination values, and the special jackpot determination table has the numerical values in the right column of FIG. 10-8(B) set as jackpot determination values. The special jackpot determination table has a larger number of jackpot determination values (called special jackpot determination values or second jackpot determination values) than the special jackpot determination table, by adding a special jackpot determination value specific to the special jackpot determination table to the jackpot determination values (called special jackpot determination values or second jackpot determination values) that are common to the jackpot determination values set in the normal jackpot determination table (called the normal jackpot determination values or first jackpot determination values). This allows the special jackpot state to be determined as a jackpot with a higher probability than the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of a random number (random R) for determining a jackpot. If the random number value for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), it decides to determine a jackpot (normal jackpot or special jackpot) for the special symbol. Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) indicates the probability (percentage) of a jackpot.

Figures 10-8 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. Figure 10-8 (B) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special pattern. Figure 10-8 (C) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special pattern.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 10-8(B) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 1 for jackpot type determination, and has jackpot determination values corresponding to "5R normal jackpot", "5R special jackpot", and "10R special jackpot".The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 10-8(C) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 1, and has a jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R special jackpot".

As shown in Fig. 10-8 (B) and (C), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) that determines the jackpot patterns of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. For example, the judgment value corresponding to a "5R normal jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "1". The judgment value corresponding to a "5R sure-variable jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "3". The judgment value corresponding to a "10R sure-variable jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "7". The special pattern 1 variable display unit 075F021 and the special pattern 2 variable display unit 075F022 in the special pattern LED board 075F020 can indicate the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting or blinking the lighting means such as LEDs in a lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot pattern. Similarly, the special pattern 1 variable display unit 075F053 and the special pattern 2 variable display unit 075F054 in the fourth pattern unit 075F050 can indicate the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting or blinking lighting means such as LEDs in a lighting pattern corresponding to each jackpot pattern.

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 1 matches, as the jackpot pattern. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

According to these various jackpot type determination tables, for jackpots with the second special symbol, the percentage of "10R sure jackpot" selected is higher than for jackpot types selectable with the first special symbol, and the percentage of jackpot types that are advantageous to the player selected is higher.

(Performance control command)
FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a presentation control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The presentation control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-9 is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Note that, although "(H)" indicates hexadecimal in the following description, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. When the performance control CPU 101 receives command 8001 (H) or command 8002 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 81XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special pattern (each corresponds to a variation pattern XX). In other words, when a unique number is assigned to each of multiple types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command that corresponds to each variation pattern identified by that number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (miss designation command) indicating that a miss has been determined. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R normal jackpot has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R special jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R special jackpot has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R special jackpot designation command) indicating that a 10R special jackpot has been determined. The miss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R special jackpot designation command, and 10R special jackpot designation command, or all of these collectively, are also referred to as 8C commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates the start of the changing display of the first special pattern. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates the start of the changing display of the second special pattern. The first pattern change designation command and the second pattern change designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern confirmation designation command that specifies the end of the changing of the first special pattern and/or the second special pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization command that specifies initialization (specifies that the initial screen at power-on is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery command that specifies power outage recovery (specifies that the power outage recovery screen is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state command that specifies the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state command that specifies the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a special probability state command that specifies the background of the special probability state. Each of the normal state command, time-saving state command, and special probability state command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95 series command or background command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of a 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of a 5R special jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a special jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of a 10R special jackpot. The jackpot start 1 designation command, jackpot start 2 designation command, and jackpot start 3 designation command, or all of these collectively, are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying when the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A1 series command. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying after the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is closed for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying after the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of a 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of a 5R special jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of a 10R special jackpot. The jackpot end 1 designation command, jackpot end 2 designation command, and jackpot end 3 designation command, or all of these collectively, are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command that specifies that a V win has occurred. The high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V large winning port enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command B200(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved memory number designation command that designates that the first reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second reserved memory designation command that designates that the second reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C2 series command.

Commands C4XX(H) and C6XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a fluctuation pattern type judgment, when a start winning is made at the first or second start winning port. Of these, command C4XX(H) is a design designation command that indicates whether or not a winning has occurred, and the type of jackpot judgment result, among the winning judgment results. In addition, command C3XX(H) is a fluctuation type command that indicates the judgment result of which range of judgment values the value of the fluctuation pattern type judgment random number falls within, among the winning judgment results (fluctuation pattern type judgment result).

C7XX(H) is a special prize opening entry designation command that indicates the passage of the game ball through the special prize opening on the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-hit display off command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned off. A command in which MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT data is 1 is a right-hit display on command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned on. In this embodiment, the right-hit display on command is also referred to as an FD command.

At the time of start winning, the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether or not a jackpot will be generated, the type of jackpot, and the value of the random number for judging the type of fluctuation pattern, which range of judgment values it falls within. Then, it sets a value specifying a jackpot and a value specifying the type of jackpot in the EXT data of the designation command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The game control microcomputer 100 also sets a value specifying the range of judgment values as the judgment result of the type of fluctuation pattern in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the designation command, and can recognize the type of fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type command.

[Action]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F will be described. First, the process by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 10-10 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal special symbol processing. As shown in FIG. 10-10, in the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 judges whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the second special symbol) (step 075FS001). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (N in step 075FS001), it judges whether a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (step 075FS002). If the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step 075FS002), the normal special symbol processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is sent, a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set, which indicates that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent. Then, when the special symbol normal processing is executed after the next timer interruption after the customer waiting demo designation command is sent, the customer waiting demo designation command is controlled not to be sent again based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started.

When there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 judges whether the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating "second" (i.e., data indicating "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 075FS005). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the second special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the display of the second special symbol changes based on the data in the second reserved memory is executed in priority over the display of the first special symbol changes based on the data in the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 indicated by the special pattern pointer based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (step 075FS009). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads Random R (random number for determining a jackpot) from the reserved memory buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for determining a jackpot that was extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figure 10-8) with the random number for determining a jackpot, and determines that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of determining a jackpot.

In the process of determining whether or not a jackpot has been generated, when the game state is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the game state is not in a probability variable state (normal game state or time-saving state). Specifically, a probability variable jackpot determination table (table with the values on the right side of FIG. 10-8(A) set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and a normal time jackpot determination table (table with the values on the left side of FIG. 10-8(A) set) in which a smaller number of jackpot determination values are set than in the probability variable jackpot determination table are provided. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the game state is in a probability variable state, and when the game state is in a probability variable state, performs the process of determining whether or not a jackpot has been generated using the probability variable jackpot determination table, and when the game state is in a normal state or time-saving state, performs the process of determining whether or not a jackpot has been generated using the normal time jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining a jackpot (RANDOM R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 10-8(A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it determines that a jackpot has occurred (Y in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. Note that determining whether or not to determine whether or not to determine a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also means determining whether or not to determine whether or not the stopped symbol in the special symbol is a jackpot symbol.

Whether the current game state is in a high probability state is confirmed by checking whether the high probability state flag is set. The high probability state flag is set when the game state transitions to a high probability state, and is reset when the high probability state ends. Specifically, the high probability state flag is set in the process of ending a jackpot game, and is then reset at the timing when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stopped pattern is displayed stationary when either the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the next jackpot has been determined, whichever occurs first, is met.

If the value of the random number (Random R) for determining a jackpot does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step 075FS011), proceed to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number (random R) for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 075FS012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table to be used to determine the jackpot type as one of the multiple types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 10-8(B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 10-8(C) are selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8(B). Additionally, when the special symbol pointer is pointing to "second," the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8 (C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for determining the type of jackpot extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and using the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013, determines the jackpot type and jackpot pattern that correspond to the value that matches the value of the random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1) stored in the reserved memory buffer (step 075FS014).

As shown in Figures 10-8 (B) and (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern is set so that the jackpot pattern differs for each jackpot type, and the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern are determined simultaneously, so that the correspondence between the jackpot pattern and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, preventing the game control from becoming complicated.

The CPU 103 also sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, if the jackpot type is a "5R normal jackpot", the jackpot type data is set to "01". If the jackpot type is a "5R variable jackpot", the jackpot type data is set to "02". If the jackpot type is a "10R variable jackpot", the jackpot type data is set to "03".

Next, the CPU 103 sets the stopping symbol for the special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, the "-" symbol, which is a losing symbol, is set as the stopping symbol for the special symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stopping symbol for the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be a "5R normal jackpot", the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "1". When the jackpot type is determined to be a "5R special jackpot", the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "3". When the jackpot type is determined to be a "10R special jackpot", the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "7".

Then, the CPU 103 sends a display result designation command (step 075FS017) and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 10-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects a miss fluctuation pattern type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads out random 2 (random number for fluctuation pattern type determination) from the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the fluctuation pattern type to one of a plurality of types by referring to the selected table.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern in the change time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a pattern change designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern change process (S112) (step 075FS105).

(Special pattern variation processing)
Fig. 10-12 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variation process. As shown in Fig. 10-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (S113) (step 075FS203). When the variation time timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 10-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets an end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and performs control to derive and display the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 075F021 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 075F022 (step 075FS301). If data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 075F021 is ended, and if data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the second special symbol in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 075F022 is ended. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol determination designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the big win flag is set (step 075FS303). If the big win flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability bonus flag and the time-saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, it transmits a jackpot start command and a right-hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

Also, referring to the opening pattern data stored in RO101, data indicating the opening mode of the normal large prize winning port and the V large prize winning port, such as the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time between rounds (for example, 0.5 seconds), are set in a predetermined memory area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal large prize winning port in all 1R to 5R, etc., is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM102. In the case of a 5R sure-change jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal large prize winning port in the 1st to 3rd Rs and the 5th Rs, and the V large prize winning port in the 4th Rs, etc., is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM102. In addition, in the case of a 10R sure-change jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal large prize winning port in the 1st to 8th Rs and the 10th Rs, and the V large prize winning port in the 9th Rs, etc., is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM102. The data on the number of times it was opened (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening counter to count the number of times it was opened.

The large prize opening control timer is also set to a value equivalent to the fanfare time, which is the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the large prize opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large prize opening is opened and the round begins. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time-saving flag indicating the time-saving state is set (step 075FS309). If the time-saving flag is not set (N in step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. If the time-saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time-saving count counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time-saving state is decremented by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). If the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time-saving state has ended, and the time-saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when the variable display that results in a miss display occurs a specific number of times (150 times) in the time-saving state, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. In step 075FS311, if the value of the time-saving counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS311), the process transitions to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the probability variable flag indicating the probability variable state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability variable flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability variable flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315) and proceeds to step 075FS316. If the probability variable flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process of step 075FS314 is not performed and the process proceeds to step 075FS315. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process ends.

(Pre-opening process for big win)
Fig. 10-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening pre-processing. As shown in Fig. 10-14, in the big win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by 1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big win opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big win opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process is terminated.

If the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command to specify that the large prize opening is open is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the regular large prize opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the regular large prize opening is opened in the first round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the large prize opening control timer to a large prize opening opening time (29 seconds) corresponding to the maximum time that the large prize opening can be opened (large prize opening opening time) based on the opening pattern data (for example, data stored in the RAM 102 by step 075FS306) (step 075FS405). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large prize opening processing (S115) (step 075FS406), and ends the processing.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
10-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening process. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the big win opening process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by 1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (step 075FS502). If the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. If the value of the large prize opening control timer has not reached 0 (N in step 075FS502), the process determines whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (step 075FS503). Whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open can be determined from the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step 075FS503 that the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V prize switch 075F024 is on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is on (Y in step 075FS504), the prize number counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether the high probability variable flag is set (step 075FS506). The high probability variable flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the machine will be controlled into the high probability variable state when a V win occurs. If the high probability variable flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), processing proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the high probability variable flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether the V win switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS507). If the V win switch 075F024 is not on (N in step 075FS507), processing proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability change determination flag is set (step 075FS508), a probability change determination device pass command is sent (step 075FS509), and processing proceeds to step 075FS510.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter has not reached the predetermined number (N in step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 performs either control to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large prize opening, or control to drive the solenoid 075F083 to close the V large prize opening (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-large prize opening process (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the process.

(Post-opening processing)
10-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 10-16, in the big win release post-processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the release number counter is 0 or not (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening count counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (the time at which the jackpot game is notified, for example, on the image display device 5 that the jackpot game has ended) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process ends.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the large prize opening control timer is set to a value equivalent to the interval time from the end of a round to the start of the next round (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is before the round in which the V large prize opening is opened (also called the V opening round), i.e., whether or not the next round is a V opening round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal large prize opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 to open the V large prize opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify whether the big win opening is in progress (step 075FS610). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big win opening processing (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the processing.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 10-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot opening control timer in which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the jackpot opening control timer is 0 (whether the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the jackpot opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the jackpot flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the high probability flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the high probability flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. If the high probability flag is set in step 075FS704 (Y in step 075FS704), the high probability flag indicating that the game is in a high probability state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a high probability state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the high probability flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time-saving flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is active (step 075FS710), and the time-saving count counter is set to 150 (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, if the probability of a bonus has not been set in step 075FS704 (N in step 075FS704), then in step 075FS705, a time-saving flag is set indicating that the game is in the time-saving state (step 075FS705), the time-saving counter is set to 100 (step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time-saving state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 is able to recognize whether the game is in a special, time-saving, or normal state based on the special state designation command sent from the CPU 103.

(Performance processing during big win)
Next, the processing by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 will be described. FIG. 10-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the performance processing during a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 10-18, in the performance processing during a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the performance control CPU 120 when data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received is stored in the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and are erased at a predetermined timing such as when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot end command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). If the process timer has timed out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 075FS656). In addition, the performance device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is controlled according to the content of the next set process data (step 075FS657). For example, the performance control CPU 120 reads image data from ROM 121 according to the content of the process data in order to display an image corresponding to the performance during the round on the image display device 5, and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the lighting/flashing/extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9. Also, to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output sound, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the presentation devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) continues according to the contents of the set process data (step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The performance control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the performance control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, it sets process data corresponding to the fanfare performance in order to execute the fanfare performance under the control of the performance device. Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a right-hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, it lights up the lighting means such as an LED in the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 to encourage the player to hit right.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command (A1 series command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of a jackpot, it sets process data corresponding to the mid-round performance in order to execute the mid-round performance under the control of the performance device, as follows.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A102 command) to specify when the large prize opening is in progress from the CPU 103 at the start of the second round of a 5R normal jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V-type probability variation indication effect that indicates whether or not the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R normal jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify when the jackpot has started that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 2R) based on the command (A102 command) to specify when the large prize opening is in progress, and sets process data for executing an indication corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, a V-type probability variation indication effect).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of the second round of a 5R special jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V special jackpot suggestion performance (see FIG. 10-41). At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R special jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 2R) based on the command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open, and sets process data for executing a performance corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, a V special jackpot suggestion performance).

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress from the CPU 103 at the start of the third round of a five round special jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V notice performance (see FIG. 10-42) that notifies the player that the next fourth round will be a V opening round. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a five round special jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, the third round) based on the command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress, and sets process data for executing a performance corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, a V notice performance).

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A203 command) to specify after the opening of the large prize opening from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R sure-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 sets process data for executing the "Aim for V" performance (see FIG. 10-43) that aims to make the game ball enter the V large prize opening, which is a specific area, between rounds. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R sure-variable jackpot) based on the already received jackpot start specification command (A0 series command), specifies the round of the jackpot that has ended (in this case, 3R) based on the command to specify after the opening of the large prize opening (A203 command), and sets process data for executing the performance (in this case, the "Aim for V" performance) according to the specified post-round during the jackpot. The "Aim for V" performance is a guide display using an image display related to the V large prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the Aim for V presentation, an image is displayed that encourages the player to hit to the right to launch the game ball toward the V large prize opening, which is a specific area. In the Aim for V presentation, an image may be displayed that points to the V large prize opening itself, which is a specific area, an image may be displayed that points to the vicinity of the V large prize opening, which is a specific area, or an image may be displayed that points to the path to the V large prize opening, which is a specific area.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4th round of a 5R sure-win jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to execute the Aim for V performance (see FIG. 10-44). At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 5R sure-win jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 4th round) based on the command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open, and sets process data for executing the performance corresponding to the identified round of the jackpot (in this case, the Aim for V performance).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A108 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8th round of a 10R sure-win jackpot, it sets process data for executing a V notice performance that notifies the player that the next 9th round will be a V opening round. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 10R sure-win jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 8th round) based on the command (A108 command) to specify that the large prize opening is in progress, and sets process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V notice performance) that corresponds to the round of the jackpot that has been identified.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A208 command) to specify after the opening of the large prize opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of a 10R sure-win jackpot, it sets process data for executing a "Aim for V" performance that aims to make the game ball enter the V large prize opening, which is a specific area, between rounds. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 10R sure-win jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify after the opening of the large prize opening that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot that has ended (in this case, 8R) based on the command (A208 command) to specify after the opening of the large prize opening, and sets process data for executing a performance (in this case, the "Aim for V" performance) that corresponds to the end of the round during the identified jackpot.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (A109 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of the 9th round of a 10R special jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to execute the "Aim for V" performance. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance identifies the type of jackpot (in this case, a 10R special jackpot) based on the command (A0 series command) to specify the start of the jackpot that has already been received, and identifies the round of the jackpot (in this case, 9R) based on the command (A109 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open, and sets process data for executing the performance (in this case, the "Aim for V" performance) according to the round of the jackpot that has been identified.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a command (AD00 command) to specify passage through the probability change determination device from the CPU 103 during a jackpot round, it sets process data corresponding to the V winning presentation in order to execute the V winning presentation by controlling the presentation device as follows.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (AD00 command) to specify passage through the probability change determination device from the CPU 103 during the 4th round of a 5th round probability change jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning performance (see Figure 10-44).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a command (AD00) to specify passage through the probability change determination device from the CPU 103 during the 9R of a 10R probability change jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning performance.

In addition, when the presentation control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot gaming state, it sets process data for executing an ending presentation (see Figures 10-46 and 10-47) that indicates the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data based on the performance control commands received from the CPU 103, thereby controlling the performance devices such as the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9 to execute various performances.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F also has the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 already described, but the following will particularly explain the part of the game related to the characteristic part 075F.

In pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits with the left hand to launch a game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started. When the result of the first special game is that the special game 1 variable display unit 075F021 is in a display mode showing a jackpot pattern, a jackpot occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the first special pattern game include a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R special chance jackpot, and a 10R special chance jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hit promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to make a right hit. The right-hit promotion effect is executed by displaying text (for example, "right hit") and a graphic image (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage a right hit, and also by lighting up the right-hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050, lighting means such as LEDs to encourage a right hit. This causes the player to make a right hit from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, five times for a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R special jackpot, and ten times for a 10R special jackpot). The jackpot opening is continued until a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), whichever comes first.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal large prize entry port opens in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V large prize entry port opens only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize, there will be no V prize. Also, since there will be no V prize, the Aim for V performance will not be executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round will be displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal large prize entry port opens in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V special probability suggestion performance is executed, which suggests whether or not there is a special probability jackpot. Then, as a result of the V special probability suggestion performance, it is announced that it is a normal jackpot, not a special probability jackpot. After that, the V large prize entry port opens in the 4th round, but no V prize occurs, and then in the 5th round, the normal large prize entry port opens, and when the 5th round ends, the ending performance is executed.

In the case of a 5R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V special jackpot is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of a 5R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, as in the 5R normal jackpot, and in the 2nd round, a V special jackpot suggestion effect is executed, which indicates whether or not it is a special jackpot. Then, as a result of the V special jackpot suggestion effect, it is announced that it is a special jackpot. Then, in the 3rd round after that, a V notice effect is executed, which indicates that the next 4th round is a V opening round. In the 4th round, the V special jackpot is opened, and when the game ball that entered the V special jackpot is detected by the V entry switch 075F024, a V entry occurs. This gives the player the right to control the game state after the jackpot round to a special jackpot state. After that, in the 5th round, the regular big prize slot opens again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending performance is performed.

In the case of a 10R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V special jackpot is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, in the case of a 10R special jackpot, the normal special jackpot is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds, and in the 7th round, a V special jackpot suggestion effect is executed, which suggests whether or not it is a special jackpot. Then, as a result of the V special jackpot suggestion effect, it is announced that it is a special jackpot. Then, in the 8th round, a V notice effect is executed, which announces that the next 9th round is a V opening round. In the 9th round, the V special jackpot is opened, and when the game ball that entered the V special jackpot is detected by the V entry switch 075F024, a V entry occurs. This gives the player the right to control the game state after the jackpot round to a special jackpot state. After that, in the 10th round, the regular big prize slot opens again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending performance is performed.

When the ending performance after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times for a 5R normal jackpot, 150 times for a 5R special jackpot and a 10R special jackpot). Furthermore, in the case of a 5R special jackpot and a 10R special jackpot, if a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is controlled to the special jackpot state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) that are controlled to the time-saving state. In other words, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the game state after the jackpot round becomes a low-probability high-base state, and in the case of a 5R special jackpot or a 10R special jackpot, the game state after the jackpot round becomes a high-probability high-base state.

Even in the special probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round, the right-hit promotion effect continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 075F030, and the right-hit display unit 075F055. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also called the first hit) occurs, the player is always prompted to hit right by the right-hit promotion effect, even in the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the time-saving state, control is performed to shorten the average special chart change time (period during which the special chart changes) more than in the normal state, and control is performed to shorten the average regular chart change time (period during which the regular chart changes) more than in the normal state, and further control is performed to increase the probability of a "regular chart hit" in the regular chart game more than in the normal state. Also, in the time-saving state, electric chute support control may be performed to increase the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B that forms the second start winning port is opened, thereby increasing the frequency at which the game ball enters the second start winning port, making it easier to win in the second start winning port (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time-saving state after the jackpot round, the released game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, starting the second special game. As a result of the second special game, when the special game 2 variable display section 075F022 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot pattern, a jackpot (also called a consecutive win) occurs.

As mentioned above, the type of jackpot in the second special game is the 10R guaranteed jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 075F030, and right-hit display unit 075F055 continues from the first jackpot.

During a round in which a jackpot game is in progress, the jackpot opening opens a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). Each opening of the jackpot opening continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first.

Because it is a 10R sure-win jackpot, the normal big prize opening is open in the 1st through 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big prize opening is only open in the 9th round. Specifically, like the first win, the normal big prize opening is open in the 1st through 7th rounds. Then, in the 8th round that follows, a V notice performance is executed, notifying the player that the next 9th round will be a V opening round. In the 9th round, the V big prize opening is opened, and when the game ball that entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V entry switch 075F024, a V entry occurs. This gives the player the right to control the game state after the jackpot round to a sure-win state. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, an ending performance is executed.

Then, when the ending presentation after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state and the probability variable state (high probability, high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) in the same way as the first hit. Even in the probability variable state after the jackpot round in a consecutive hit, the right-hit promotion presentation continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 075F030, and the right-hit display unit 075F055. Therefore, after the first hit occurs, consecutive hits occur in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends, and the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion presentation, even in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends in the consecutive hit.

When the probability variable state or time-saving state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the probability variable state or time-saving state after the first jackpot round ends, or the probability variable state or time-saving state after the consecutive jackpot round ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 075F030, and right-hit display unit 075F055 also ends. As a result, the player will again use the left hit to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
With reference to Fig. 10-19 to Fig. 10-21, the timing of the main processing executed by the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F will be described. Fig. 10-19 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a winning fluctuation. Fig. 10-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. Fig. 10-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the jackpot ends. Fig. 10-19 to Fig. 10-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-19, at t1, when the first special symbol game starts with the game ball entering the first start winning hole, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a pattern change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for changing and displaying decorative symbols in response to the change in the first special symbol, and for executing a change-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a preview performance) in accordance with the change in the first special symbol.

For example, the performance control CPU 120 updates the display of the first reserved memory display area 075F005D and updates the lighting state of the special pattern 1 memory display unit 075F051 by specifying the first reserved memory number based on the reserved memory number specification command. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the game state by specifying the game state being controlled based on the background specification command. The performance control CPU 120 also specifies that the special pattern will start to change based on the pattern change specification command, and sets the start timing of the performance. The performance control CPU 120 also specifies the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the display result specification command, and determines the corresponding decorative pattern. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 also sets the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern (presence or absence of a reach, etc.), and the content of the performance during the variable display of the decorative pattern (type of reach performance, etc.) based on the variation pattern specification command.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops at t2, the CPU 103 sends a symbol determination command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the symbol determination command.

When a jackpot occurs as a result of the special symbol fluctuation stop, at t3 thereafter, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start command (A0 command) and a right-hit display lighting command (FD command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing a fanfare performance and lights up lighting means such as an LED in the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for displaying an image congratulating the jackpot on the image display device 5 as a fanfare performance, and outputting a sound congratulating the jackpot from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays an image encouraging right-hitting on the image display device 5 as a right-hit promotion performance, and outputs a sound encouraging right-hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 10-20, when the big win round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal big win opening and sends a big win opening open command (A101 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the first round.

After that, when the first round ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A201 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, when the second round starts at t6, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is open. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance during the round in the second round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing a V probability change suggestion performance (see FIG. 10-41) based on the command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open.

After that, when the second round ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance settings based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, when the third round starts at t8, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a large prize opening open command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the third round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing a V preview performance (see FIG. 10-42) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command).

After that, when the third round ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the inter-round performance from after the third round to the fourth round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V performance (see FIG. 10-43) based on the command (A203 command) to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 10-21, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is open. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 4th round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V preview performance (see FIG. 10-42) and then the Aim for V performance (see FIG. 10-43) based on the command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open.

After that, when a V win occurs at t11, the CPU 103 sends a command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify passage of the probability change determination device. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V win performance (see FIG. 10-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the regular large prize opening and sends a command (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, when the 5th round starts at t13, the CPU 103 opens the normal large prize opening and sends a large prize opening open command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th round ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the normal large prize opening and sends a command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any special performance settings based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end command (A3 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending performance.

After that, the game is controlled to a high probability state and a time-saving state (high probability high base state), and in this state, the CPU 103 changes the performance control command depending on whether the number of reserved memories exceeds 0.

For example, at t16, if the number of reserved memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a pattern change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for changing and displaying the decorative patterns in response to the change in the second special pattern, and for executing a performance during change (for example, a reach performance or a preview performance) in accordance with the change in the second special pattern.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved memories does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration performance (see FIG. 10-60) that allows the player to identify that no game is being played. For example, the performance control CPU 120 displays an image of an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or a small pattern on the image display device 5, or stops the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Note that the customer waiting demonstration performance is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 10-60, and may be any performance that allows the player to identify that no game is being played, such as a character image or the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1.

[Lamp lighting status]
Fig. 10-22 is an explanatory diagram showing the lighting state of the lamps. In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, right panel lamp 075F009F, left panel lamp 075F009E, right frame lamp 075F009R, left frame lamp 075F009L), the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are shown in a black-painted state as shown in Fig. 10-22 (A) when each of them is turned off.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are shown in a white-painted manner as shown in Figure 10-22 (B) when they are lit.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacca lamp 9c, attacca upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are each shown as being lit/blinking/off in a manner corresponding to the performance and the background displayed on the image display device 5, in a hatched manner as shown in FIG. 10-22 (C).

[Performance of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
Next, a description will be given of the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game. Figures 10-23 to 10-33 and 10-38 to 10-50 are explanatory diagrams showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 10-23(a), when a losing symbol stops due to the variation of the special symbol in the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbol. After that, if there is a first reserved memory number, the CPU 103 transmits a reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol variation designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative symbol in response to the variation of the first special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or executes a variation-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a notice performance) in accordance with the variation of the first special symbol. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each of the performances in Fig. 10-23(b1) to Fig. 10-24(b3) based on the reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command). In other words, each of the performances performed between Fig. 10-23(b1) to Fig. 10-24(b3) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-23(b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-23(b2), in the event of a jackpot variation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 sends a symbol determination command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the symbol determination command.

As shown in FIG. 10-24(b3), when a jackpot occurs as a result of the stop of the special symbol fluctuation, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start command (A0 command) and a right-hit display lighting command (FD command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 executes a fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights up the lighting means such as an LED in the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 10-24(c1) to FIG. 10-38(d2) based on the jackpot start command (A0 command) and the right-hit display lighting command (FD command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-24(c1) to FIG. 10-38(d2) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

Now, the fanfare effect will be described in detail. The fanfare effect is divided into multiple effect parts. In this embodiment, the fanfare effect includes a celebration part, a name display part, and a right-hit promotion part. The celebration part is an effect part in which an effect to celebrate a jackpot is executed, and as described later in FIG. 10-24 (c1), an image celebrating the jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound celebrating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to a lighting mode celebrating the jackpot. The name display part is a presentation part that informs the player that a jackpot round is about to start by announcing the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred, and also informs the player of the type of the jackpot game state that has occurred. As described later in Fig. 10-24 (c2) and (c3), a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state corresponding to the start of the jackpot. The right hit promotion part is a presentation part that encourages the player to hit right, and as described later in Fig. 10-24 (c4) to Fig. 10-33 (c29), a big right hit promotion presentation is executed that encourages the player to hit right using image displays of letters and figures. After the jackpot symbol stops and the symbol is confirmed, the performance control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation command (8F00) from the CPU 103, and then starts a fanfare performance based on the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103, and continues the fanfare until the regular jackpot opening opens and the jackpot round begins.

As shown in FIG. 10-24(c1), as the congratulatory part in the fanfare performance, an image congratulating the player on the big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound congratulating the player on the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to a lighting state congratulating the player on the big win. In addition, as a right-hit promotion performance, a small right-hit promotion performance is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the text "right hit") is displayed small in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. The image display device 5 has multiple layers, and a predetermined image can be displayed on each layer. As shown in FIG. 10-24(c1), the image consisting of a figure and text in the small right-hit promotion performance is displayed on a layer on the front side (toward the player as seen from the pachinko game machine 1) of the image congratulating the player on the big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!"). In addition, in the fanfare performance, a sound encouraging right-hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-hitting promotion performance, the lighting state of the right-hitting display unit 075F030 and the right-hitting display unit 075F055 changes to a state encouraging right-hitting (lighting in this example). The start order of the above-mentioned image display and lighting is as follows. First, after the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0 command) and a right-hitting display lighting command (FD command), and lights up the right-hitting display unit 075F030. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the right-hitting display unit 075F055 based on the received right-hitting display lighting command (FD command), while displaying an image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-hitting promotion performance and an image celebrating the jackpot based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0 command) on the image display device 5. At this time, the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance located closer to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image celebrating the big win. That is, first, the lamps are turned on in the order of the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055, and then the images consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and the image celebrating the big win are displayed in that order. In addition, the display of the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and the lighting of the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 are performed until the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. At that time, first, after the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display off designation command together with a background designation command, and turns off the right hit display unit 075F030. The performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display unit 075F055 based on the received right hit display off designation command, while ending the display of the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and displaying the normal background image on the image display device 5 based on the received background designation command. Note that the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance and the lighting by the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 may start and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right hit promotion performance coincides with the lighting period by the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055, making it easier for the player to understand the period for hitting right.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare performance, a part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, "CHANCE" from the text image "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state corresponding to the start of the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-25(c3), as the name display part in the fanfare effect, following FIG. 10-24(c2), the remaining part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, "BONUS!!" from the text image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, the text image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the big right hit promotion effect that is executed in the right hit promotion part of the fanfare effect that starts from the next timing. After that, from FIG. 10-24(c4) to FIG. 10-33(c29), a big right hit promotion effect is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and text (in this example, the text "right hit") is displayed large in the center of the image display device 5 as a right hit promotion effect.

Here, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIG. 10-34 to FIG. 10-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs guidance light emission to encourage the player to hit the right by moving the light-emitting part of the frame lamp based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table. In this embodiment, the light-emitting part literally refers to the part that is emitting light. For example, the part where the light-emitting lamp is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the light-emitting part, and the part where the other lamps that are not lit (i.e., the lamps that are turned off) are located is not called the light-emitting part. In other examples, the light-emitting part refers to the part that is emitting light with high brightness. For example, the part where the light-emitting lamp is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the light-emitting part, and the part where the lamp that is lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the light-emitting part is not called the light-emitting part. The lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the performance control CPU 120 is explained in detail below.

Figure 10-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table. As shown in Figure 10-34, in the parent table in the lighting data table, the performance time of each of the fanfare effects and the big right hit promotion effects is specified for each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the movable body lamp 9d, the bottom left lamp 075F009D, the attacca top lamp 075F009U, the board left lamp 075F009E, the board right lamp 075F009F, and the attacca lamp 9c. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is configured to perform a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then a big right hit promotion effect for 2000 msec. In addition, the big right hit promotion effect is configured to be repeated multiple times (twice in this embodiment), so the game effect lamp 9 will repeat the 2000 msec big right hit promotion effect twice.

Figure 10-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in Figure 10-35, in the child table in the lighting data table, the time for each of the fanfare effects and the big right hit promotion effects is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

Here, for the big right hit promotion effect, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L are assigned a common grandchild table W11. In addition, the bottom left lamp 075F009D, the attacca top lamp 075F009U, and the board left lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right hit promotion effect and are turned off, so no grandchild tables are provided. This allows the capacity of the lighting data used in the ROM 121 to be reduced as much as possible. For the attacca lamp 9c, the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect, 2000 msec, is further divided into multiple periods, and multiple grandchild tables are assigned. For example, grandchild table A11a is assigned to 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is assigned to 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is assigned to 320 msec.

Figures 10-36 and 10-37 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. Figure 10-36 shows data in grandchild table W11 for frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in Figure 10-36, in grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is specified over T1 to T56 at 30 msec intervals, and further data for all lamps being off (0x000000) is specified at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). Note that in the grandchild table, data for lamps 1 to 11 as shown in Figure 10-2 is specified for each of frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L. Also, in FIG. 10-36, to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the frame lamp, dashed circles are added to the data (F00) at the timing when lighting starts and the data (000) at the timing when lighting ends.

Looking at the data in the grandchild table W11, first at T1, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T2, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T3, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T4, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T5, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T6, At T3 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T7 the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T10 the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T11 the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. After lighting begins, each lamp continues to light up while changing color to form seven colors. After that, first, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T46, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T47, then the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T48, then the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T49, then the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T50, and then the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T51. The third lamp of 075F009R is turned off, then the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T52, then the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T53, then the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T54, then the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T55, then the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T56. After that, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, the time used to turn the lights on is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, so there is only about 320 msec remaining, but to ensure that the remaining time is completely turned off, the final time to turn the lights off is set to 1000 msec (T57), which is longer than the remaining time. Note that the first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the left frame lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the right frame lamp 075F009R are turned off for the entire time.

When the grandchild table W11, which stores the above-mentioned data, is used, as shown in Fig. 10-25 (c4) to Fig. 10-32 (c24), the frame lamps will light up in seven colors, starting with the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L and going from the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R in an arch from the left to the right. This kind of big right hit promotion effect using the frame lamps will be performed twice.

Figure 10-37 shows data in grandchild table K11 for movable body lamp 9d and grandchild tables A11a to A11c for attacca lamp 9c. As shown in Figure 10-37, grandchild table K11 for movable body lamp 9d specifies RGB data over T1 to T56 at 30 msec intervals, and further specifies data for all lamps to be off (0x000000) at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). Note that grandchild table K11 specifies data for the left X (left X), middle X (middle X), and right X (right X) of the character "XXX" attached to movable body 32 for movable body lamp 9d. Also, in FIG. 10-37, to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, a dashed circle is added to the data (F00) at the timing when lighting starts and the data (000) at the timing when lighting ends.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at T4, and then the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at T5. After starting to turn on, each lamp continues to turn on while changing color to seven colors. Then, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Then, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. That is, the time spent turning it on is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, so there is only about 320 msec remaining, but to ensure that the remaining time is spent turning it off, the final turn-off time is set to 1000 msec (T57), which is longer than the remaining time. Also, compared to the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (i.e., it remains off for the first T1 and T2), and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

As shown in Fig. 10-25(c4) to Fig. 10-32(c24), when the grandchild table K11 in which the data described above is stored is used, the movable body lamp 9d goes out while the fourth lamp and the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L are on, and then the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out, and then each lamp continues to light up in seven colors, and then the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. As a result, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in seven colors, starting with the lighting of the left X, then the middle X lamp, and then the right X lamp, drawing an arch from the left side to the right side. This kind of big right hit promotion performance by the movable body lamp 9d is performed twice.

Figure 10-37 also shows data in grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacca lamp 9c. As shown in Figure 10-37, in the grandchild table A11a for the attacca lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long period of time, 600,000 msec, compared to the 330 msec that is the target for lighting, and the data is specified as off (0x000000).

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacca lamp 9c, RGB data is specified at 20 msec intervals for the 1350 msec that it is to light up. However, because the attacca lamp 9c only repeats color changes in a specific pattern (e.g., seven colors) over the 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b specifies only 280 nsec for one color change pattern. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c for 280 nsec each time it refers to the grandchild table A11b at 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the 1350 msec ends, repeating the color changes in the specific pattern (e.g., seven colors).

In the grandchild table A11c of the Attacka lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long period of time, 600,000 msec, compared to the 320 msec that is the target for turning the lamp on, and the data specified is off (0x000000).

When the big right hit promotion performance is started, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the attacca lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, then causes the attacca lamp 9c to repeat color changes in a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) by referring to the grandchild table A11b multiple times at 280 nsec intervals for 1,350 msec, and then turns off the attacca lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11c for the final 320 msec. As a result, as shown in Figures 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), the frame lamps light up in an arch from the left to the right, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R reaches the vicinity of the attacca, and then the attacca lamp 9c lights up, and then the frame lamps go out in an arch from the left to the right, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R goes out, and then the attacca lamp 9c goes out. This kind of big right hit promotion effect using the attacca lamp 9c is performed twice.

In addition, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacca lamp 9c, where the lamp is initially turned off, a predetermined pattern of colors is repeated in the middle, and then the lamp is turned off again, the lighting of the attacca lamp 9c is divided into three stages and a scenario is created. For the repetition of the predetermined pattern of colors in the middle, the same grandchild table A11b is repeatedly referenced. This eliminates the need to prepare data for the entire 2000 msec lighting period from start to finish, and only the data for the repeated portion is required. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 10-25 (c4), we will now explain the presentation mode of the big right hit promotion presentation executed in the right hit promotion part of the fanfare presentation. As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L begins to light up. In line with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right hit promotion presentation.

As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c5), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c6), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. Furthermore, as the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c7), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. Furthermore, the center X of the movable body lamp 9d starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c8), the tip of an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. Furthermore, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c9), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c10), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c11), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. Furthermore, as the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c12), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c13), an arrow image pointing to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c14), an arrow image pointing to the right continues to be displayed on the image display device 5. As for the game effect lamps 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts to light up. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c15), on the image display device 5, the character image "Right" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing in the right direction. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. Furthermore, as the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacca lamp 9c, the attacca lamp 9c starts to light up. From that point on, the attacca lamp 9c repeatedly lights up and goes out (i.e., it flashes). In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c16), the image display device 5 continues to display the character image "Right" superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c17), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c18), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the center X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c19), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In addition, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c20), on the image display device 5, the text image "Right Hit" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R goes out. Furthermore, the board right lamp 075F009F goes out. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. In accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamps 9, sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed superimposed on an arrow image pointing to the right. As for the game effect lamps 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R goes out. Furthermore, the flashing attacca lamp 9c also goes out. Sound output from speakers 8L and 8R also stops. This ends the first series of big right-hit promotion effects.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c26), the second big right hit promotion effect starts. At this time, for the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts to light up. Note that, during the second big right hit promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are designed not to output sound in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion effect. This prevents the background music during the big hit round (sound corresponding to the background of the big hit round) from overlapping with the sound during the big right hit promotion effect when the transition occurs during the big hit round after the big right hit promotion effect has ended.

As shown in Figure 10-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second big right hit promotion performance, the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks/goes off in the same manner as in the first big right hit promotion performance, and during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R in the manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance.

In this way, the big right hit promotion effect uses larger text and graphic image displays than the small right hit promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to hit to the right in a more emphatic manner than the small right hit promotion effect. Therefore, by executing the big right hit promotion effect during the fanfare effect, it is possible to encourage the player to hit to the right in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, during the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound (for example, a whirring sound effect) is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance, effectively encouraging the player to hit to the right, while during the second big right hit promotion performance, a sound is not output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance, so as not to interfere with the background music during the big win round that starts afterwards.

In addition, in the big right hit promotion effect, the arrow image and the letter image are displayed so that they gradually appear in stages, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks to effectively encourage the player to hit to the right, and this effect is more flashy than the effect that displays the name image of the big win game state shown in Figure 10-24 (c2). For example, the letter images in the big right hit promotion effect appear one character at a time, but all the letter images in the name image of the big win game state appear at once. Also, the size of the letter images in the big right hit promotion effect is larger than all the letter images in the name image of the big win game state. Furthermore, the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect that displays the name image. As a result, after the name image of the big win game state is displayed to notify the player that a big win has occurred, the big right hit promotion effect can more emphasize the player to hit to the right.

The attacca lamp 9c is the point that the player aims at when launching the game ball in order to actually carry the game ball, so it lights up in a flashy color that is easy for the player to recognize, such as seven colors, and flashes to draw the player's attention to the point that they are aiming at. Note that the attacca lamp 9c may also be constantly lit in a predetermined color, such as seven colors, without flashing.

The following example describes the presentation of the pachinko game machine 1 when a 5R special jackpot occurs. For a 10R special jackpot, the number of rounds is different, but other presentation aspects are the same as for a 5R special jackpot. Also, for a 5 regular jackpot, it is different in that the V preview presentation and V winning presentation are not executed, but other presentation aspects are the same as for a 5R special jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 goes out and the second big right hit promotion effect ends, the switch to the big win round starts as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c27). Specifically, the arrow image and the text image "Hit right!!" fade out, gradually decreasing visibility. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 turns white. Note that the image of the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-out. Note that, as described above, a series of performance data up to the stage of FIG. 10-38 (c28) is set based on the big win start designation command (A0 series command).

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is in progress. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect in the first round. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data for each effect in FIG. 10-39 (d3) to FIG. 10-40 (e4) based on the command (A101 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIG. 10-39 (d3) to FIG. 10-40 (e4) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d3), the entire screen of the image display device 5 goes completely white, and then the background image during the big win round fades in to appear. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner that corresponds to the fade-in. Note that the image of the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, we will explain "fade in" and "fade out" in more detail. Fade in and fade out are a type of image display effect called a "transition." A "transition" is a switching effect that is inserted between a first cut (image) and a second cut (image) when editing video and the scene changes from the first cut to the second cut (image). In addition to fade in and fade out, transitions also include various techniques used in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (such as a background or character) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific technique, fade-in changes the transparency (also called transmittance) of the object (image) from a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%) to a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) that is lower than the first degree over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined period is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 100% (first degree) to 50% over the 1 second period between 0 and 1 second, and then the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 50% to 0% (second degree) over the next 1 second period between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, fade-in is not a technique that does not gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) over a certain period of time, such as a technique that changes an object (image) to opaque by switching the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) in one go. Note that if opacity (which can also be called opacity) is changed instead of transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned percentage values are reversed. In other words, fade-in changes the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) from a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) to a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%), which is higher than the second degree, over a certain period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific technique, in fade out, the transparency (transmittance) of the object (image) is changed over a predetermined time from a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) to a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%) that is higher than the first degree. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 0% (second degree) to 50% over one second between 0 and 1 second, and then the transparency (transmittance) is gradually changed from 50% to 100% (first degree) over one second between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, a technique that does not gradually change the transparency (transmittance) over a predetermined time, such as a technique that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) in one go to make the object (image) transparent, is not a fade out. In addition, when changing opacity (opacity) instead of transparency (transmittance), the fade-out changes the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) from a first degree (e.g., 100% or 99%) to a second degree (e.g., 0% or 1%) that is lower than the first degree over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-38(c26) and (d1), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen showing the arrow image and the text image of "Hit right!!" is 0%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually increased to 100%, so that the arrow image and the text image of "Hit right!!" are gradually made transparent and difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-38(d2), only the white image in the second layer of the screen, which is located further back than the first layer of the screen, is shown to the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-38(d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually decreased to 0%, so that the background image during the big win round is gradually made opaque and easy to see (fade in). This allows the player to see the background image during the jackpot round on the first layer, which is located in front of the second layer of the screen.

Note that there is also a technique called "cross-fade" as a transition. Cross-fade is a technique in which, for example, a first layer of a screen showing some kind of object is faded out while a second layer of a screen showing some kind of object located behind the first layer is faded in, so that the first layer of the screen is shown first and then the second layer of the screen is shown. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, as described above, the first layer of the screen is faded out and then faded in, so that a white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located behind is shown once during the switch from the image in the ED first period to the image in the ED second period, which is different from a technique like cross-fade.

In this embodiment, even if the background image is switched as in the transition described above, the image of the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the background image switching. Here, "affected by the background image switching" means that the player's visibility is affected in some way, such as by fading in or out of the background image switching, which may cause the player to be unable to see the image of the small right hit promotion effect completely, or the player to be able to see the image of the small right hit promotion effect a little but not understand the meaning of the image (right hit promotion). On the other hand, if the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, it can be said that the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the background image switching.

As shown in FIG. 10-39(d4), after the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in, as shown in FIG. 10-39(e1), when 1R starts, the normal jackpot opening opens and a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed in the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round performance. In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R start to output BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) in a manner corresponding to the in-round performance. In addition, as mentioned above, at the time this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the large right hit promotion performance has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e2), during the first round, a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, followed by an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e3), when the first round ends, the regular large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A201 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e4), between rounds, the regular big prize opening remains closed, and a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, followed by an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance displayed in the upper right.

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a special prize opening command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the mid-round performance in the second round based on the command from the CPU 103. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 10-41 (e5) to FIG. 10-42 (e8) based on the special prize opening command (A102 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-41 (e5) to FIG. 10-42 (e8) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5), when the second round starts, the regular big prize opening opens, a background image corresponding to the mid-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then an image (arrow and text) for promoting a small right hit is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e6), during 2R, a V probability change suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, an image encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed with the text image "PUSH!!" superimposed on a background image corresponding to the in-round effect. In addition, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit is still displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as a V probability change suggestion effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as a V probability change suggestion effect).

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B during the V-type probability variation indication effect, a text image of "Success!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the in-round effect, to notify the player that a V-type probability variation jackpot has been obtained. In addition, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) for the small right hit promotion effect continues to be displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as the V-type probability variation indication effect). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the in-round effect (such as the V-type probability variation indication effect).

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e8), when the second round ends, the regular large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e9), between rounds, the regular big prize opening remains closed, and a text image of "Success!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the performance during the round, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a special prize opening command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the mid-round performance in the third round based on the command from the CPU 103. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 10-42 (e10) to FIG. 10-43 (e12) based on the special prize opening command (A103 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-42 (e10) to FIG. 10-43 (e12) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10), when the third round begins, the regular big prize opening opens and the V preview performance is executed. Specifically, a character image and a text image saying "Grab a V in the next round!!" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the mid-round performance. In addition, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance (V preview performance, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e11), during the third round, the V preview performance continues, and a text image of "Grab a V in the next round!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 together with a character image, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the performance during the round, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V preview performance). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V preview performance).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e12), when the third round ends, the regular large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening opens. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the "Aim for V" performance in the rounds from after the third round to the fourth round, based on the command from the CPU 103.

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), the Aim for V performance is executed while the large prize opening remains closed between rounds, i.e., the game ball cannot enter the large prize opening. Specifically, an arrow image pointing to the V variable prize ball device 075F007B (V large prize opening), which is the target (location) that the player is to aim at by hitting with the right, and a text image saying "Aim" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap with a background image corresponding to the round performance. In this way, according to the Aim for V performance, the image display related to the V large prize opening can be used to encourage the player to hit with the right to make the game ball enter the V large prize opening. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the round performance (such as the Aim for V performance). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the round performance (such as the Aim for V performance).

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A104 command) to the presentation control CPU 120 to specify whether the large prize opening is in progress. In response, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the mid-round presentation for the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. The presentation control CPU 120 sets the data for each presentation in Figs. 10-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the command (A104 command). In other words, each presentation that takes place between Figs. 10-44 (e14) and 10-44 (e15) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a presentation control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V large prize opening opens and the Aim for V effect is then executed. This allows the player to aim for the V large prize opening by hitting to the right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the Aim for V effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the Aim for V effect).

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15), during the 4R, the Aim for V effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the Aim for V effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the Aim for V effect).

When a game ball enters the V large prize opening and a V prize occurs, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to designate passage of the probability bonus determination device (AD00 command). In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V prize presentation. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each presentation in FIG. 10-44 (e16) to FIG. 10-45 (e18) based on the command to designate passage of the probability bonus determination device (AD00 command). In other words, each presentation performed between FIG. 10-44 (e16) to FIG. 10-45 (e18) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a presentation control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), when the V winning effect is executed, an image of a "V" indicating that a V winning has occurred is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the mid-round effect, and then an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the V winning effect). Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round effect (such as the V winning effect).

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e17), when the 4th round ends, the V large prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command to specify what happens after the large prize opening is opened.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e18), between rounds, the V large prize opening and the normal large prize opening remain closed, and the letter "V" image is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a background image corresponding to the performance during the round, and furthermore, an image (arrow and letters) of the small right hit promotion performance is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the inter-round period ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A105 command) to the presentation control CPU 120 to specify whether the large prize opening is in progress. In response, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the mid-round presentation for the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. The presentation control CPU 120 sets the data for each presentation in FIG. 10-45 (e19) to FIG. 10-46 (e21) based on the command (A105 command). In other words, each presentation that takes place between FIG. 10-45 (e19) to FIG. 10-46 (e21) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a presentation control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the regular big prize opening opens, a background image corresponding to the mid-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then an image (arrow and text) for promoting a small right hit is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e20), during the 5th round, a mid-round performance is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the mid-round performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e21), when the 5th round ends, the large prize opening closes normally, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the time after the large prize opening is opened. The performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the command. Furthermore, at a specified timing thereafter, the CPU 103 sends a command (A3 command) to specify the end of the jackpot to the performance control CPU 120. In response, the performance control CPU 120 executes an ending performance based on the command from the CPU 103. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 10-46 (f1) to FIG. 10-47 (f4) based on the command (A3 command). In other words, each of the effects that take place between FIG. 10-46 (f1) and FIG. 10-47 (f4) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1), when the ending performance starts, an image that allows the player to select a stage in the probability variable state after the big win game state is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f2), during the ending performance, a name image indicating the name of the special state (in this example, a text image of "Yume Yume RUSH!!") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 together with a character image. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f3), during the ending performance, an addiction prevention notification performance is executed. Specifically, an image to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Be careful not to become addicted. Pachinko is a game that should be enjoyed in moderation," is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) for encouraging a small right hit is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending performance. In addition, when a consecutive win occurs, a game result image showing the game result (for example, the number of winning balls) in the jackpot game state is displayed, for example, at the bottom of the screen during the ending performance, but such a game result image may also be displayed during the ending performance even when a first win occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f4), a forget-to-remove prevention image for preventing the player from forgetting to remove a card related to the game that the player owns, such as a prepaid card or a membership card, is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the ending performance is finished, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a pattern change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative pattern in response to the change of the second special pattern based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes a change-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a notice performance) in accordance with the change of the second special pattern. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance in Figures 10-48 (g1) and (g2) based on the reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command). In other words, each of the effects that take place between Figure 10-48 (g1) and (g2) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g1), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change. Sounds are also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g2), the variation of the second special symbol stops and the losing symbol is displayed. At this time, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbol. Sound is also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbol.

After the second special symbol stops changing, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol change designation command (8D series command), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a change pattern designation command (81 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative symbol in response to the change of the second special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes a change-in-progress performance (for example, a reach performance or a notice performance) in accordance with the change of the second special symbol. The performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance in Figure 10-48 (g3) to Figure 10-49 (g5) based on the reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), symbol change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command). In other words, each of the effects that take place between FIG. 10-48 (g3) and FIG. 10-49 (g5) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g3), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change. The speakers 8L and 8R also output sounds in a manner corresponding to the start of the special symbol change.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g4), in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion effect continues to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), a group preview performance is executed as a preview performance during a jackpot fluctuation. The group preview performance is a performance in which objects such as characters appear gradually or all at once on the screen of the image display device 5 to make the visibility of the reach pattern difficult, and then the objects disappear to make a specific pattern arrangement (for example, 777) appear. Even if a preview performance that makes the visibility of the pattern difficult is executed in such a reach mode, the image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen without being affected by the display of the performance image. Here, "affected by the display of the performance image" means that the player's visibility of the image of the small right hit promotion performance is hindered or reduced by the display of a performance image such as a group preview, such that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right hit promotion performance, or the player can see a little of the image of the small right hit promotion performance but cannot understand the meaning of the image (right hit promotion), and the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, it can be said that the image of the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the display of the effect image.

When the variation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 sends a symbol determination command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not set any particular performance based on the symbol determination command.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g6), when a jackpot (10R guaranteed jackpot) occurs as a result of the special symbol stopping, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start command (A0 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that since the right-hit promotion performance has already been executed, the right-hit display lighting command (FD command) is not sent. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 executes a fanfare performance based on a command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data for each performance in FIG. 10-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start command (A0 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-50 (h1) and (h2) progresses over time, rather than being triggered by a performance control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h1), as a fanfare effect, an image celebrating the big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yay!!") is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound celebrating the big win is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state celebrating the big win. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), after the fanfare effect starts, a name image (in this example, a text image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!") indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting state corresponding to the start of the jackpot. In addition, in the case of a consecutive win with a hit on special chart 2, since the big right hit promotion effect has already been executed when the special chart 1 was hit, the big right hit promotion effect is not executed again. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. 10-32 (c24), the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect, and furthermore, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 sends a command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 to specify that the large prize opening is open. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect for the first round.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (i1), when the first round of the big win begins, the normal big prize opening opens, and a background image corresponding to the in-round performance is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, followed by an image (arrow and text) of the small right hit promotion performance in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the in-round performance.

After that, although not shown, various effects such as the V preview effect, the Aim for V effect, and the V prize are executed during the round as shown in Fig. 10-40 to Fig. 10-46, and when the big win round ends, an ending effect is executed as shown in Fig. 10-46 and Fig. 10-47. Then, as shown in Fig. 10-48, the game is again controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state. During this series of games, an image (arrow and letters) of a small right hit promotion effect is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right hit display section 075F030 of the special symbol LED board 075F020 and the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 each continue to light up. When the probability state after the jackpot game state ends without a jackpot occurring and the state is controlled to the normal state, the CPU 103 sends a right-hit display off command to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and text) of the small right-hit promotion performance in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and turns off the right-hit display section 075F030 of the special symbol LED board 075F020 and the right-hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. This allows the player to hit left again in the normal state.

[Presentation of the Pachinko Game Machine 1 When Power is Restored from an Outage]
Fig. 10-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored from a power outage during the fanfare presentation due to the hit of special chart 1. The power outage shown in Fig. 10-51 assumes power outage 1 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off during the fanfare presentation as shown in Fig. 10-20 and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-51, if a power outage occurs in any of the following states, an image congratulating the player on a big win (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-24(c1) state), a name image indicating the name of the big win game state (in this example, a text image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-24(c2) state), only an arrow image in the big right hit promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-28(c14) state), and a text image of "Hit right!!" is displayed on the image display device 5 together with an arrow image in the big right hit promotion effect (FIG. 10-31(c23) state), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then the text image of "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A101 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A101 command) is received, the performance image during 1R, such as that shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1), is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A101 command). In addition, all of the images, such as the image congratulating the player on the big win (in this example, the character image and the text image "Congratulations!!"), the name image indicating the name of the big win game state (in this example, the text image "CHANCE BONUS!!"), the arrow image in the big right hit promotion performance, and the text image "Hit right!!" added to the arrow image in the big right hit promotion performance, are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs before the big right hit promotion effect is executed or before the big right hit promotion effect is completed, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to minimize the disadvantage to the player, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the regular big prize opening.

Figure 10-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during the first round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 10-52 assumes power outage 2, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 10-20.

As shown in Figure 10-52, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the performance during round 1 is displayed on the image display device 5 (as shown in Figure 10-40 (e2)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance waits until it receives a command (A102 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the CPU 120 receives the command, it displays a performance image during 2R, such as that shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5), on the image display device 5 based on the command (A102 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big win round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. If prize balls are obtained during the subsequent rounds, the points can be added again starting from 0pt, for example, by adding 10pt for every 10 balls obtained. Note that the point image is not limited to being displayed as 0pt after the power is restored, and the points can be made unclear by a predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a big win round, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned back on, so the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to minimize the disadvantage to the player, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big win opening in the next round.

Figure 10-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage during the round after one round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 10-53 assumes power outage 3, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after one round, as shown in Figure 10-20, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 10-53, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the performance between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 10-40 (e4)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A102 command) to specify whether the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A102 command) is received, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during 2R, such as that shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5), based on the command (A102 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big win round is displayed as 0pt, since the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 10-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage during the 2nd round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 10-54 assumes power outage 4, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 10-20.

As shown in Figure 10-54, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the V-variable indication effect during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 10-41 (e7)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command (A103 command), it causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during 2R based on the command (A103 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, since the memory of the points in RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview performance such as that in Figure 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in addition to the large prize opening open command (A103 command) after power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 can be configured to execute a V preview performance like that shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command) and the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a big win round, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned back on, so the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to minimize the disadvantage to the player, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big win opening in the next round.

Figure 10-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage between two rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 10-55 assumes power outage 5, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off between two rounds after the jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-20, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 10-55, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the second round is displayed on the image display device 5 (as shown in Figure 10-42 (e9)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A103 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command (A103 command), it causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during 2R based on the command (A103 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, since the memory of the points in RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview performance such as that in Figure 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in addition to the large prize opening open command (A103 command) after power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 can be configured to execute a V preview performance like that shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command) and the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 10-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of a pachinko gaming machine when power is restored after a power outage between rounds three rounds after a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 10-56 assumes power outage 6, which occurs when the power supply to pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off between rounds three rounds after the jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-21, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 10-56, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the round after the third round is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 10-43 (e13)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and then when the power is turned on, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A104 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command (A104 command), it causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image during the 4R based on the command (A104 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt, because the memory of the points in RAM 122 is erased by the power outage. Also, because the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V performance as shown in Figure 10-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. Furthermore, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in addition to the large prize opening open command (A104 command) after power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 can be configured to execute the Aim for V performance as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14) based on the large prize opening open command (A103 command) and the jackpot start command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the V large prize opening in the next round.

Figure 10-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage during the 4th round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 10-57 assumes power outage 7, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 10-21.

As shown in Figure 10-57, if a power outage occurs when an image corresponding to the Aim for V in 4R presentation is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 10-44 (e15)), or when an image corresponding to the V winning presentation is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 10-44 (e16)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a text image saying "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A105 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A105 command) is received, the performance image during the 5th round, such as that shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19), is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A105 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0 points, since the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a big win round, the small right hit promotion effect is executed from the point when the power is turned on after that, so the player can be encouraged to hit the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored from the power outage, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right and not being able to enter the normal big prize opening in the next round. Furthermore, in the case where a power outage occurs while the Aim for V effect and the small right hit promotion effect are being executed together, as in the 4th round, and in the case where a power outage occurs while the small right hit promotion effect and the large right hit promotion effect are being executed together, as shown in Figure 10-51 above, both have in common that after the power is restored from the power outage, the Aim for V effect and the large right hit promotion effect are not executed, but the small right hit promotion effect is executed to the very least. Therefore, in both situations, the player can be encouraged to hit the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored in a common manner.

Figure 10-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored after a power outage between rounds four rounds after a jackpot on special chart 1. The power outage shown in Figure 10-58 assumes power outage 8, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off between rounds four rounds after the jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-21, and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in Figure 10-58, if a power outage occurs during the rounds after the 4th round when an image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 10-45 (e18)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command (A105 command) to specify that the large prize opening is open from the CPU 103. When the command (A105 command) is received, the performance image during the 5th round is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the command (A105 command). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0 points because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on again, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the player from suffering a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to get the game ball into the regular big prize opening in the next round.

Figure 10-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during the final round of a jackpot when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 10-59 assumes power outage 9, which occurs when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 10-21.

As shown in Figure 10-59, if a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to the mid-round performance during the 5th round is displayed on the image display device 5 (as shown in Figure 10-46 (e20)), or while the 5th round has ended (as shown in Figure 10-46 (e21)), the image will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5, and the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end command (A3 system command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end command (A3 system command), it displays a performance image corresponding to an ending performance such as that shown in Figure 10-46 (f1) on the image display device 5 based on the jackpot end command (A3 system command).

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the final round of a jackpot, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned back on, so that the player can be encouraged to make a right hit at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to make a right hit as much as possible.

Figure 10-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when power is restored from a power outage during the ending presentation when special chart 1 is hit. The power outage shown in Figure 10-60 assumes a power outage 10 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending presentation and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 10-21.

As shown in FIG. 10-60, if a power outage occurs during any of the ending effects, when an image that allows the player to select a stage in the high probability state after a jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-46(f1)), when a name image showing the name of the high probability state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with a character image (the state of FIG. 10-47(f2)), when an image corresponding to the addiction prevention notification effect and a game result image showing the game result in the jackpot game state are displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-47(f3)), or when a forget-to-remove prevention image for preventing the player from forgetting to remove a card owned by the player is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-47(f4)), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, and then the text image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Even during recovery, the image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hit display unit 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right hit display unit 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 also light up their lighting means to promote right hits.

After that, if there are reserved memories, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives these commands, it displays a performance image corresponding to the change of the special pattern as shown in Figure 10-48 (g1) on the image display device 5 based on the reserved memory number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command), pattern change designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and change pattern designation command (81 series command).

On the other hand, if there are no reserved memories, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103, and upon receiving these commands, it restores the display on the image display device 5 with the initial pattern (in this example, the decorative pattern and small pattern "123") stopped based on the background designation command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command).

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the ending, the small right-hit promotion effect will be executed from the moment the power is turned on afterwards, so the player can be encouraged to make a right hit at the very least immediately after the power is restored after the power outage, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering disadvantages such as forgetting to make a right hit and not being able to win in the second start winning slot in the special probability state after the jackpot game state.

[Major effects obtained by characteristic part 075F]
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the above-mentioned feature portion 075F are listed individually.

(1-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right hit suggestion effect or an "Aim for V" effect by the effect control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that uses an image display to encourage a player to launch the game medium toward a second flow path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
a specific area into which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through a V large winning port provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)), a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and a third guidance display using an image display related to the specific area (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during the execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. 10-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d1) and (d2), a portion in which an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect is ended while an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, while the game medium is in a state in which it is impossible for the game medium to enter the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is performed and an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, even after the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area changes to a state in which the game medium can enter the specific area, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect and an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect are continued),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is terminated while an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect is continued),
When a power outage occurs while the first and second guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23)), and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, and when a power outage occurs while the second and third guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15)), the image display is displayed again in a manner such that the first and third guidance displays are not displayed and the second guidance display is displayed (for example, the portion where the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 10-51 and FIG. 10-57).

(1-2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right hit suggestion effect or an "Aim for V" effect by the effect control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that uses an image display to encourage a player to launch the game medium toward a second flow path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
a specific area into which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through a V large winning port provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)), a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and a third guidance display using an image display relating to the specific area (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during the execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. 10-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect is ended while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the closing of the attacker corresponding to the round preceding the round in which the specific area can be entered, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), a portion in which an image corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is displayed and an image corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of an attacker corresponding to a round preceding the round that allows entry into the specific area, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15), a portion in which an image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect and an image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect are continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the game medium entering the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), a portion in which the image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect is continued),
When a power outage occurs while the first and second guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23)), and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, and when a power outage occurs while the second and third guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15)), the image display is displayed again in a manner such that the first and third guidance displays are not displayed and the second guidance display is displayed (for example, the portion where the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 10-51 and FIG. 10-57).

(1-3) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right hit suggestion effect or an "Aim for V" effect by the effect control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) that uses an image display to encourage a player to launch the game medium toward a second flow path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area;
a specific area into which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through a V large winning port provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B);
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)), a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and a third guidance display using an image display relating to the specific area (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during the execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. 10-38 (c26)),
Then, by receiving a 1R open command (for example, a command to specify that the large prize opening is open (A101 command)), the first information display is terminated while the second information display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the large right hit suggestion effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued),
Then, by receiving a command after the end of the third round (for example, a command specifying after the opening of the large prize opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), an image corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is displayed and an image corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, by receiving a 4R opening command (for example, a command for designating the opening of the large prize opening (A104 command)), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15), a portion for continuing the image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect and the image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit Suggestion" effect),
Thereafter, by receiving a V-pass command (for example, a command for designating passage of a probability change determination device (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), a portion in which the image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the "Small Right Hit" suggestion effect is continued),
When a power outage occurs while the first and second guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23)), and when a power outage occurs and the power is restored, and when a power outage occurs while the second and third guidance displays are being displayed (for example, while an image display corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15)), the image display is displayed again in a manner such that the first and third guidance displays are not displayed and the second guidance display is displayed (for example, the portion where the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 10-51 and FIG. 10-57).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the large right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect are executed to emphasize the right hit promotion, so that the player is sure to recognize that he will hit the right in the subsequent games, and thereafter, the large right hit promotion effect is terminated while the small right hit promotion effect is continued as it is, so that the player is not appealed to hit the right excessively. In addition, the "Aim for V" effect for aiming at the V large prize winning hole is executed from the point when the V large prize winning hole is still closed, and is continued even after the V large prize winning hole is opened, so that the importance of aiming at the V large prize winning hole is appealed to the player, and it is possible to ensure that the game ball enters the V large prize winning hole. In addition, by terminating the "Aim for V" effect after the V large prize winning hole is closed due to the occurrence of the V prize winning, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promotional notification from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, the small right hit promotion effect is continuously executed, so that the player can be always encouraged to hit the right even before the V large prize winning hole is opened and after the V prize winning occurs. This allows the instruction to the player to hit to the right to be executed in an optimal manner. Also, in both cases where a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored, and in both cases where a power outage occurs while an image corresponding to an Aim for V effect and an image corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored, the text image "Recovering..." and the image of the small right hit promotion effect are displayed after the power is turned on, so that even if a power outage occurs, the player can be encouraged to continue hitting to the right in subsequent games at the very least.

(2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by a presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging a player to hit to the right) using an image display to encourage a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) along which the game medium can flow in the game area,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)),
The guidance display means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, during a predetermined period in which a start effect (e.g., a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are displayed (e.g., an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect and an image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect shown in Fig. 10-25 (c4) to Fig. 10-38 (c26)),
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1) to FIG. 10-46 (e21), during a jackpot round, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect is not performed while an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect is continued),
In a special state (e.g., a probability variable state, a time-saving state) after the control of the advantageous state ends, the second guidance display is continued (for example, a portion that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance in the probability variable state after a jackpot as shown in Figs. 10-48 and 10-49),
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in association with the control of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-38 (d1) to Fig. 10-39 (d4), a portion that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of a performance image in the special state (for example, an image display due to a group preview performance) (for example, a portion that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the image display due to the group preview performance, as shown in Figure 10-49 (g5)).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the large right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect are executed to emphasize the right hit promotion, so that the player is sure to recognize that he will hit the right in the subsequent game, and during the subsequent big win round, the large right hit promotion effect is ended while the small right hit promotion effect is continued, so that the player is not appealed to hit the right excessively. In addition, by continuing the small right hit promotion effect even in the probability variable state or time-saving state after the big win game state ends, the player can be encouraged to always hit the right. Furthermore, after the big win occurs, the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching from the fanfare effect to the big win round, and the small right hit promotion effect is not affected by the image display of the group notice effect that is performed in the probability variable state or time-saving state after the big win game state ends, so that the player can be encouraged to always hit the right. This makes it possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, a display of an image encouraging a player to shoot a right-hit) that encourages a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10-33).
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission multiple times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-25 to 10-33, a portion in which the frame lamp is lit in an arch shape from the left side to the right side twice in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
The sound output means includes:
In conjunction with the first of the multiple guide lights, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light is output (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-25 (c4) to Fig. 10-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right hit promotion performance, a part that outputs a sound from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 10-32 (c26) to Figure 10-33 (c29), when the frame lamp is lit in the second big right hit promotion performance, the part where the sound is not output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1), a portion that outputs a sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round after the start of the jackpot round),
In a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, a part in which no sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot gaming state is displayed to make the player aware that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled. Then, after making the player aware that a jackpot round has started, a large right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player to hit the right in an emphasized manner, thereby ensuring that the player will hit the right in subsequent games. Also, while the large right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the lit area of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right hits, so that the player can be more effectively encouraged to hit the right. Furthermore, when the first right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound corresponding to the right hit promotion is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the right hit promotion, whereas when the last (second in this embodiment) right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound corresponding to the right hit promotion is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the right hit promotion. Therefore, the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion does not overlap with the BGM during the jackpot round output after the big right hit promotion performance is executed, and the BGM during the jackpot round can be smoothly heard by the player. Also, in the probability change state or time reduction state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with a special chart 2 hit, since the right hit promotion has already been performed, the big right hit promotion performance is not executed as in the first hit with a special chart 1 hit, and the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion performance linked thereto is not output, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(3-2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, a display of an image encouraging a player to shoot a right-hit) that encourages a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10-33).
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission multiple times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-25 to 10-33, a portion in which the frame lamp is lit in an arch shape from the left side to the right side twice in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
The sound output means includes:
In conjunction with the first of the multiple guide lights, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light is output (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-25 (c4) to Fig. 10-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right hit promotion performance, a part that outputs a sound from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 10-32 (c26) to Figure 10-33 (c29), when the frame lamp is lit in the second big right hit promotion performance, the part where the sound is not output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1), a portion that outputs a sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round after the start of the jackpot round),
The guidance means does not emit the guidance light when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot gaming state is displayed to make the player aware that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled. Then, after making the player aware that a jackpot round has started, a large right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player to hit the right in an emphasized manner, thereby ensuring that the player will hit the right in subsequent games. Also, while the large right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the lit area of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right hits, so that the player can be more effectively encouraged to hit the right. Furthermore, when the first right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion in conjunction with the right hit promotion, whereas when the last (second in this embodiment) right hit promotion is performed by the frame lamp, a sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion. Therefore, the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion does not overlap with the BGM during the jackpot round output after the big right hit promotion performance is executed, and the BGM during the jackpot round can be smoothly heard by the player. Also, in the probability change state or time reduction state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with a special chart 2 hit, since the right hit promotion has already been performed, the big right hit promotion performance is not executed as in the first hit with a special chart 1 hit, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance in conjunction with the right hit promotion, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(4-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, a display of an image encouraging a player to shoot a right-hit) that encourages a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10-33).
The guidance means performs the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance display after turning off the light-emitting means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-25 to 10-33, a part that turns off the frame lamp once and then lights it in an arch shape from the left side to the right side in conjunction with an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion performance),
The sound output means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light is output in conjunction with the guidance light being emitted (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-25 (c4) to Fig. 10-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right hit promotion performance, a sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hit promotion performance).
Thereafter, in a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, a part in which no sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right side modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed to make the player aware that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the big right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player that he or she will hit the right side in an emphasized manner, so that the player can be sure to recognize that he or she will hit the right side in subsequent games. In addition, while the big right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp is turned off once, and then the lit portion of the lamp moves to the right to promote right hitting, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side more clearly and effectively. Furthermore, when the frame lamp is used to promote right hitting, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hitting promotion, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side by the sound as well. In addition, in the event of a consecutive win on special chart 2 in a probability variation state or time-saving state after a big win game state, the right-hit promotion has already been performed, so the big right-hit promotion effect is not executed as in the case of the first win on special chart 1, and no sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect linked to it is output, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right-hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(4-2) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A launching means (e.g., a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (e.g., a game ball) into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means (for example, a process for executing a right-hit promotion presentation by the presentation control CPU 120) for displaying a guidance display (for example, a display of an image encouraging a player to shoot a right-hit) that encourages a player to shoot the game medium toward a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, out of a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a left area of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through a right area of the game area);
A guidance means (for example, a process of executing a right hit suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120) that performs guidance light emission to encourage a player by moving the light emitting point of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L) to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path;
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a big right hit promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect located in the upper right corner of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed in a manner more emphasized than the second guidance display, urging the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path (for example, a large right hit promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and figures than a small right hit promotion effect),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means performs the second guidance display before the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state), which is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state (for example, a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a small right hit promotion effect before the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and performs the first guidance display after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state (a portion that performs an image display corresponding to a large right hit promotion effect after the display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10-33).
The guiding means is
After turning off the light-emitting means, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-25 to 10-33, after turning off the light once, the frame lamp is lit in an arch shape from the left side to the right side in conjunction with an image display corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance),
Thereafter, in a special state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state ends, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot on special chart 2, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, after a jackpot occurs, a small right-hit promotion effect is first executed to encourage the player to hit the right side modestly, and then a name image showing the name of the jackpot game state is displayed to make the player aware that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the big right-hit promotion effect is used to notify the player that he or she will hit the right side in an emphasized manner, so that the player can be sure to recognize that he or she will hit the right side in subsequent games. In addition, while the big right-hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp is turned off once, and then the lit portion of the lamp moves to the right to promote right hitting, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side more clearly and effectively. Furthermore, when the frame lamp is used to promote right hitting, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right hitting promotion, so that the player can be encouraged to hit the right side by the sound as well. In addition, in the event of a consecutive win on special chart 2 in a probability variation state or time-saving state after a big win game state, the right-hit promotion has already been performed, so the big right-hit promotion effect is not executed as in the case of the first win on special chart 1, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect linked to it, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the right-hit promotion being frequently emphasized. This allows the instruction to the player to hit right to be executed appropriately.

(5) The second guidance display is displayed in a more emphasized manner than the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of the start performance.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-hit promotion effect shown in Fig. 10-25 to Fig. 10-33 is larger than the name image display in the fanfare effect shown in Fig. 10-24 (c2), and the text images appear one by one in stages, and the execution time is longer and more emphasized. This makes it possible to emphasize to the player that he or she should hit right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means includes:
outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emitted in conjunction with the first guidance light emitted among the plurality of guidance light emissions;
Among the multiple times of the guidance light emission, in conjunction with the intermediate guidance light emission, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is not output,
When the final guidance light emission is performed among the multiple guidance light emission, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-hit promotion effects by the frame lamps that are performed multiple times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect in conjunction with the first right-hit promotion, but the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect for the second or subsequent right-hit promotions. For example, if the right-hit promotion effect by the frame lamps is performed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in conjunction with the first right-hit promotion based on the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect, but do not output a sound in conjunction with the second or subsequent right-hit promotions. In other words, the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect includes only sound data that is linked to the first right-hit promotion. This prevents the sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion from overlapping with the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hit promotion effect is performed, and allows the player to smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means includes:
outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emitted in conjunction with the first guidance light emitted among the plurality of guidance light emissions;
outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emitted in conjunction with the intermediate guidance light emitted among the multiple guidance light emissions;
When the final guidance light emission is performed among the multiple guidance light emission, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-hit promotion effects by the frame lamps over multiple times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect in conjunction with the first right-hit promotion, and the speakers 8L and 8R also output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect in conjunction with the subsequent right-hit promotions, but the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound corresponding to the right-hit promotion effect for the last right-hit promotion. For example, when the right-hit promotion effect by the frame lamps is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in conjunction with each of the first and second right-hit promotions based on the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect, and do not output a sound in conjunction with the third right-hit promotion. In other words, the sound data for the right-hit promotion effect only includes sound data in conjunction with each of the first and second right-hit promotions. Note that the sound data only includes sound data in conjunction with one right-hit promotion, and the performance control CPU 120 may execute two loops of sound data in conjunction with one right-hit promotion. Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data linked to two right hit promotions, and the performance control CPU 120 may execute the sound data linked to two right hit promotions once. This allows the player to smoothly hear the background music during the jackpot round without the sound corresponding to the right hit promotion overlapping with the background music during the jackpot round that is output after the big right hit promotion performance is executed.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and emits the guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display after all of the plurality of lamps are turned off (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-25(c3), a portion that turns off all of the frame lamps once and then lights up the frame lamps in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance).

Specifically, all of the frame lamps are turned off once, and then the frame lamps are lit in a manner that corresponds to the big right hit promotion performance, so that the player can be encouraged to hit to the right in a clearer and more effective manner.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guidance light in association with the first guidance display based on data defined by a lighting data table,
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in Figure 10-34) that specifies the execution time of the guidance light emission, a child table (for example, the child table shown in Figure 10-35) that indicates a grandchild table in which data to be referenced by the light emission means is specified, and the grandchild table (for example, the child table shown in Figures 10-36 and 10-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamps 9, including the frame lamps, refer to the parent table to determine the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect, refer to the child table to determine the grandchild table in which the lighting data is specified, and refer to the grandchild table to turn on/blink/turn off. This allows the game effect lamps 9 to be lit efficiently in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) The grandchild table corresponding to the light-emitting means that does not emit the guidance light is not specified in the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the bottom left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right hit promotion performance and are therefore turned off, so no grandchild table is provided. This allows the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 to be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guidance means performs the guidance light emission by sequentially moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, a portion that sequentially lights up each lamp included in the frame lamp from the left side to the right side of the game area as shown in Figures 10-25 to 10-33).

Specifically, as shown in Figures 10-25 to 10-33, by lighting each lamp included in the frame lamp in sequence from the left side to the right side of the play area, a big right hit promotion effect is executed, which clearly encourages the player to hit to the right.

(12) The guidance means emits the guidance light while changing the light color of the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights up a frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, the frame lamp lights up in seven colors while performing a big right-hit promotion effect, more effectively encouraging players to hit to the right.

(13) The second guidance display is not affected by fade-in and fade-out switching of background images, which is performed in association with the control of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-38 (d1) to Fig. 10-39 (d4), a portion that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect without being affected by fade-in and fade-out switching of background images).

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 10-38 (d1) to Fig. 10-39 (d4), the small right-hit promotion effect continues without being affected by the background image switching display caused by the fade-in and fade-out when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue hitting to the right even if the background image switching display causes the fanfare effect to switch to the jackpot round.

(14) The second guidance display, as a display of a performance image in the special state, is not affected by a display in a preview performance that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), a portion that continues to display an image corresponding to a small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the image display in the group preview performance).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), in the probability variable state after the jackpot favorable state ends, the small right hit promotion effect continues without being affected by the display in the advance notice effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur. As a result, even if the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see due to the advance notice effect being executed, the arrow image and text image in the small right hit promotion effect continue to be displayed without being hindered in visibility, so the player can be encouraged to continue hitting to the right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guide light is not emitted either (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect, as occurs during the first win, and the frame lamps do not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling annoyed by the right hit promotion being frequently emphasized.

[Modification of characteristic portion 075F]
A modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the above-mentioned characteristic part 075F will be described.

(About turning off the lights before the big right hit promotion performance is performed)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-25(c3), all the lamps of the frame lamps are turned off once, and then the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. However, it is not limited to turning off all the lamps, and some of the lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is turned on first in the big right hit promotion performance (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be turned on. In this way, the connection when the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance afterwards can be clearly seen.

(About the display change during the big win round)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 10-38 (d1) to Fig. 10-39 (d4), when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round, the background image is switched by fading in and out, but this is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a whiteout effect in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round, or a blackout effect in which a pure black screen is inserted, may be used.

In addition, the display change during the jackpot round may be to display a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (music), and switch to a background image corresponding to the BGM selected on the BGM selection screen.

In addition, the switching display during the jackpot round may display a mode selection screen for selecting a presentation mode, and switch to a background image corresponding to the mode selected on the mode selection screen.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during a big win round, it is important that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is not affected.

(Display of the performance image during the probability change state after the big hit game ball state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), the image display by the group notice effect is exemplified as the display of the effect image in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, but it is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, a whiteout effect in which a pure white screen is inserted during the reach effect, a blackout effect in which a pure black screen is inserted, a pseudo consecutive notice effect in which the decorative pattern changes and the temporary stop are repeated multiple times, or a light guide plate provided on the front side of the play area is turned on or blinked to make the visibility of the decorative pattern difficult may be used. In either case, even if a special effect display is performed in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, it is sufficient that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is not affected.

(About the "Aim for the V" production)
In this embodiment, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning hole provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified as the specific area, and an image pointing to the V large winning hole is displayed as the "Aim for V" performance as shown in Fig. 10-43 (e13). However, this is not limited to this, and the image display in the "Aim for V" performance, which is the third guidance display using an image display related to the specific area, is not limited to one pointing to the V large winning hole itself, but may also point to the vicinity of the V large winning hole, or may point to the path leading to the V large winning hole, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V large winning hole located upstream of the V large winning hole.

(Regarding the promotion of big right hits)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 10-25 (c4) to Fig. 10-31 (c23), an arrow graphic image appears first, and then the text image "Hit right!!" appears, but this is not limited to this. For example, the text image "Hit right!!" may appear first, and then the arrow graphic image may appear. In addition, the image display of the large right hit promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a text image, whereas the image display of the small right hit promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display, may be composed of only an arrow image or only a text image.

(About advantageous situations)
In this embodiment, the period of the "advantageous state" is exemplified as the period shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) to FIG. 10-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 10-20 to t16 in FIG. 10-21), but is not limited thereto. For example, the period of the "advantageous state" may be the period excluding the fanfare effect period, that is, the period shown in FIG. 10-39 (d3) to FIG. 10-47 (f4) (the period from t4 in FIG. 10-20 to t16 in FIG. 10-21). In addition, the fanfare effect and the big right hit promotion effect may be executed during the period in which the pattern that will cause a jackpot is determined (pattern determination period).

(About the right-hand hit promotion effect in the case of the first hit)
In this embodiment, in the case of a jackpot on a special chart 1, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, the manner of the big right hit promotion performance of the speakers 8L and 8R and the frame lamp may be made different depending on the type of jackpot on a special chart 1. For example, when a jackpot on a special chart 1 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, while the speakers 8L and 8R do not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and when a jackpot on a special chart 1 is a guaranteed jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R may output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. In addition, if the jackpot on special chart 1 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp may not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L, 8R may not output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance.

(About the right-hit promotion effect in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive wins on special chart 2, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, the frame lamp may light up in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, while the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance.

Also, depending on the type of consecutive wins on the special chart 2, the manner of the big right hit promotion performance of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be made different. For example, if the jackpot on the special chart 1 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp may be lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, while the speakers 8L, 8R may not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and if the consecutive win on the special chart 2 is a sure-win jackpot, the frame lamp may be lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L, 8R may output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. Also, if the consecutive win on the special chart 2 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp may not be lit in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L, 8R may not output a sound in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance. If the consecutive hits on special chart 2 are a guaranteed jackpot, unlike the first hit on special chart 1, the frame lamp may light up in a special manner (for example, gold or seven colors) according to the big right hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R may output a sound in a special manner according to the big right hit promotion performance. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, the big right hit promotion performance may be executed in a special manner (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit on special chart 1.

(Regarding the third guide sign)
In this embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display related to the specific area, an image pointing to the V-large winning hole during the jackpot round in the probability jackpot has been exemplified, but this is not limited thereto. For example, as the third guidance display, in the probability jackpot state after the jackpot game state ends, an image urging the player to aim at the second start winning hole and launch the game ball, or an image urging the player to aim at the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) and launch the game ball may be displayed. For example, after the ending performance ends, the performance control CPU 120 may display a text image of "Aim!" on the image display device 5 together with an arrow image pointing to the second start winning hole or the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) based on receiving a reserved memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a pattern change designation command (8D system command), a display result designation command (8C system command), and a change pattern designation command (81 system command) from the CPU 103. Even if such an image display is performed, the graphic and text images in the small right hit promotion performance may be continuously displayed.

(Regarding control of time-saving state by displaying losing symbols)
In each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbols or part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a big win symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern can be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. In addition, a lottery using a structure may be held, for example, a time-saving area may be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area is considered to be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

When the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed) will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, when drawing the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random numbers as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since performance other than the probability of winning varies depending on the settings.

The timing of the lottery results for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is only performed in the low probability, low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving times may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as it is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a number of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving patterns can be changed between Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving periods awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times the time-saving function is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving function until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving function is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a specified number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times for the time-saving limiter is updated. Also, the pattern confirmation time for the time-saving pattern may be different from the pattern confirmation time for other patterns.

In the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 075F, the game state must always go through the jackpot game state in order to be controlled to the time-saving state, so the big right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect for encouraging the player to hit the right in the time-saving state can be performed during the fanfare effect that is performed when a jackpot occurs. However, if the above-mentioned losing symbol is used as the time-saving symbol, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot game state, so when the time-saving state is controlled in response to the display of the losing symbol, time must be secured to execute the big right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect between the display of the losing symbol and the control to the time-saving state. Therefore, the big right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect can be executed using the method shown below.

For example, if the pattern determination time until the fluctuation of a losing pattern that is not a time-saving pattern stops is set to 0.5 seconds, the pattern determination time until the losing pattern that is a time-saving pattern stops may be set to 30 seconds, which is longer than the time-saving pattern, and a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed during that time to notify the start of control of the time-saving state. In addition to a display result designation command indicating a normal losing fluctuation that does not grant time saving as a command for specifying a loss, the CPU 103 may prepare a display result designation command indicating a losing fluctuation for time saving that grants time saving in addition to a display result designation command indicating a normal losing fluctuation that does not grant time saving, and transmit a performance control command to the performance control CPU 120 using both commands depending on whether or not the time-saving pattern is a losing fluctuation. Then, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a display result designation command indicating a normal losing fluctuation, the pattern determination time may be set to 0.5 seconds, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives a display result designation command indicating a losing fluctuation for time saving, the pattern determination time may be set to 30 seconds.

During the 30-second pattern determination time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a name image (for example, "Time-saving RUSH") indicating the name of the time-saving state on the image display device 5, outputs a sound from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the control of the time-saving state, and lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to the control of the time-saving state. A portion of such a time-saving fanfare performance can be made to correspond to a portion of the fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2).

10-24(c1), an image (for example, a text image of "Congratulations!") celebrating the time-saving state may be displayed on the image display device 5 before the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") due to this time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, a sound celebrating the time-saving state may be output from the speakers 8L, 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to a lighting mode celebrating the time-saving state. Also, as a small right-hit promotion effect, a small right-hit promotion effect may be executed in which an image consisting of a figure (an arrow pointing to the right) and text (the text "Right hit") is displayed small on the upper right corner of the image display device 5, a sound encouraging right hitting may be output from the speakers 8L, 8R, or the lighting mode of the right-hit display unit 075F030 and the right-hit display unit 075F055 may be changed to a mode encouraging right hitting (lit). In addition, the image in the small right hit promotion effect displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right hit display unit 075F030 and the right hit display unit 075F055 start and end at the same timing. In other words, both are designed to encourage the player to make a right hit for the same period of time.

After that, as in the example shown in FIG. 10-24(c2), the small right hit promotion effect may continue to be executed while the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") due to the time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, and then, as in the example shown in FIG. 10-25(c3), the game effect lamp 9 may be temporarily turned off, and then, as in the examples shown in FIG. 10-25(c4) to FIG. 10-38(c26), the large right hit promotion effect may be executed during the time-saving fanfare effect. During this time, the small right hit promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after the large right hit promotion effect is executed, the game state may be controlled to the time-saving state, and the small right hit promotion effect may be continued, as in the examples shown in FIG. 10-48 to FIG. 10-50.

In this way, even if the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing pattern, by ensuring a pattern determination time that is longer than the pattern determination time for a losing pattern that is not a time-saving pattern, it is possible to execute a large right hit promotion effect or a small right hit promotion effect during that pattern determination time.

In the case where the time-saving state is controlled by the losing symbol as a trigger, it is not limited to using the symbol determination time to execute the big right hit promotion effect or the small right hit promotion effect as described above. If there is a reserved memory corresponding to a miss for the next game (change) of the game in which the losing symbol that grants the time-saving is determined, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed and the big right hit promotion effect or the small right hit promotion effect may be executed in the next game (change). Specifically, if the next game (change) of the game in which the losing symbol is determined is a miss change, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed and the big right hit promotion effect or the small right hit promotion effect may be executed instead without executing an effect that makes you expect a hit such as a reach effect or a notice effect. However, if the next game (change) of the game in which the losing symbol is determined is a big hit, the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) is executed afterwards, so the time-saving fanfare effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory for the next game (change) after the game in which the losing symbol that grants the time-saving bonus has been confirmed, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed while the symbol is not changing, and the large right hit promotion effect and the small right hit promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, in order to prevent the customer waiting demonstration effect from being executed and the time-saving fanfare effect being hindered, the CPU 103 is not sent a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Alternatively, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) from the CPU 103, the time-saving fanfare effect may be executed without executing the customer waiting demonstration effect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each feature may be combined with some or all of the features of other features as appropriate. The combined features or individual features that are not combined may be combined with some or all of the features of other features as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of first identification information and a variable display of second identification information,
a launching means capable of launching game media into a game area in response to an operation by a player;
a guidance display means for displaying a guidance message using an image to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second flow-down path out of a first flow-down path and a second flow-down path along which the game medium can flow down in the game area;
the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means is
during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the name display of the advantageous state, which is part of a start effect notifying the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, the second guidance display is performed, and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued;
In a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued;
In a special state after the control of the advantageous state is ended, the second guidance display is continued;
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in association with the control of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-38 (d1) to Fig. 10-39 (d4), a portion that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
moreover,
The game control system includes a state control means capable of controlling to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a portion executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17, and a portion executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (e.g., a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13), and the state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means so that the numerical information corresponds to the special number of times. and the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71).
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, so that the player can be rescued more easily, and the player's motivation to play can be increased.

In other words, by emphasizing the instruction to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction with the first and second guidance displays for a predetermined period of time after the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, and then instructing to launch the game ball in the predetermined direction by taking over the second guidance display without taking over the first guidance display, the instruction can be avoided from being overemphasized and made to feel irritating, and further, the second guidance display can be displayed first to modestly instruct the game ball to be launched in the predetermined direction, and then the name of the advantageous state can be recognized, and after recognition, the first guidance display can firmly instruct the game ball to be launched in the predetermined direction, and since the numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information and when the variable display of the second identification information are executed, the numerical information is more likely to reach the special number of times and the player is more likely to be rescued than, for example, when the numerical information is updated only when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and therefore it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in an arcade, gives players easy-to-understand instructions on the direction in which to launch the gaming ball when in an advantageous state, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

The display mode of the guidance display may also be changed depending on the value of the numerical information updated by the update means. For example, when the numerical information reaches a specific number of times, a corresponding guidance display may be displayed, making it possible to inform the player of the number of times in an easily understandable manner.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of increasing interest, there is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of first identification information and a variable display of second identification information, and that has a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19). and updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100). The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a portion executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 100, a portion for executing steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173), an updating means for updating the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a portion for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13), a predetermined suggestion effect execution means for executing a predetermined suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect) when the variable display is executed (for example, a portion for executing step 108IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 12-49), and a control of a special state starting based on the establishment of a special condition. Examples of gaming machines include a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a background image changes as shown in Fig. 12-52 (C1) and (C2), a blackout occurs when the fluctuation starts as shown in Fig. 12-53 (B), or a blackout occurs when the fluctuation ends as shown in Fig. 12-54 (C)) that notifies a player that a certain condition will be satisfied (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638 as shown in Fig. 12-23), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect during the period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A as shown in Fig. 12-44; see Fig. 12-50). Examples of the form of this gaming machine are described below as other examples.

(Other examples)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Then, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include setting a stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), an initialization process (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S909). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S908) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S906) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the change of the special symbols will be resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described below.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S907). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9011), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9012). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Next, the gaming machine according to Example 1 in the characteristic part 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 12-1 to 12-47.

(Board configuration)
Fig. 12-1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 108IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 108IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in Fig. 1, a right-hit LED 100IW10 is provided below the normal reserve display 25C as shown in Fig. 12-1. Also, as shown in Fig. 12-1, a right-hit notification LED 100IW20 is provided to the right of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, fourth pattern displays 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Of these, the fourth pattern display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variable display of the fourth pattern in synchronization with the variable display of the first special pattern. Also, the fourth pattern display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variable display of the fourth pattern in synchronization with the variable display of the second special pattern. In this example, the fourth pattern display devices 100IW21a and 21b are each composed of two LEDs arranged above and below, and the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed by these two LEDs repeatedly turning on and off alternately.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic section 108IW, instead of the pass gate 41 shown in FIG. 1, a pass gate 100IW41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. In this characteristic section 108IW, a normal game is executed based on the game ball passing through the pass gate 100IW41. Therefore, in this characteristic section 108IW, since the probability of hitting a normal game increases in the probability of a special mode or time-saving mode, it is advantageous to perform a firing operation (right-hitting operation) aimed at the right of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal mode, in this characteristic section 108IW, it is advantageous to perform a firing operation (left-hitting operation) aimed at the left of the game area.

(Probability of winning, probability of losing the time-saving feature)
FIG. 12-2 and FIG. 12-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the probability of a big win and the probability of a time-saving miss for each setting value. Among these, FIG. 12-2 shows the probability of a big win and the probability of a time-saving miss when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 12-3 shows the probability of a big win and the probability of a time-saving miss when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured to be able to set any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the probability of a big win is different), and it is possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value by executing a setting confirmation process or a setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1. Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2 and FIG. 12-3, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed to six stages from "1" to "6". It is to be noted that the setting is not limited to being able to be changed to six stages, and may be changed to, for example, two to five stages or seven or more stages.

As shown in Figures 12-2 (A) and 12-3 (A), when the first special symbol variable display is executed and when the second special symbol variable display is executed, in the non-probability variable state (low probability state (normal state or time-saving state)), the setting value of "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/319), making it the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2," setting value "3," setting value "4," and setting value "5," with setting value "6" having the highest jackpot probability of "242/65536" (approximately 1/270), making it the most favorable setting for the player.

As shown in Fig. 12-2(B) and Fig. 12-3(B), in both cases of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the high probability state (high probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536" (about 1/32), which is the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and the setting value "6" has the highest jackpot probability of "2420/65536" (about 1/27), which is the most favorable setting for the player. As shown in Fig. 12-2 and Fig. 12-3, in this example, in the high probability state, the jackpot probability is increased by 10 times compared to the non-high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 12-2, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, the probability of the time-saving miss is constant at 164/65536 (approximately 1/400) regardless of the setting value between 1 and 6 (and regardless of whether the game is in a special probability state or not). As shown in FIG. 12-3, when the second special symbol variable display is executed, the probability of the time-saving miss is constant at 328/65536 (approximately 1/200) regardless of the setting value between 1 and 6 (and regardless of whether the game is in a special probability state or not). In other words, in this example, the judgment value for judging the time-saving miss is common regardless of the setting value.

Even if the jackpot probability is varied according to the setting value as described above while the probability of losing without time-saving is configured to be constant, the number of judgment values for each setting value can be made consistent by varying the probability of losing without time-saving between setting values "1" to "6" as shown in Figures 12-2 and 12-3.

The game may also be configured to be controllable to a small win game state. If the game is configured to be able to determine a small win as well, the game may be configured so that the probability of a small win is constant, regardless of the setting value, for example, between "1" and "6."

In addition, if the configuration is such that small wins can also be determined, it may be configured so that there is a small win with time reduction that is controlled to a time-saving state when a small win occurs.

The examples shown in Figures 12-2 and 12-3 are merely examples, and various modes are possible for setting the jackpot probability and the time-saving failure probability. For example, in this example, as shown in Figures 12-2 and 12-3, the time-saving failure probability is approximately 1/400 when the first special symbol variable display is executed, and the time-saving failure probability is approximately 1/200 when the second special symbol variable display is executed. However, conversely, it may be configured so that the time-saving failure probability is approximately 1/200 when the first special symbol variable display is executed, and the time-saving failure probability is approximately 1/400 when the second special symbol variable display is executed.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 12-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 12-4(A) shows a specific example of a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 12-4(B) shows a specific example of a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 12-4(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol, to determine the type of jackpot as either a "normal jackpot," "variable jackpot," or "sudden variable jackpot" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol, to determine the type of jackpot as either a "normal jackpot," a "variable jackpot," or a "sudden variable jackpot" based on a random number for type determination.

A "normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 15-round jackpot game state, and then transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When the game transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the 100-time variable display ends or the next jackpot occurs.

A "high probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a 15-round jackpot game state, and then transitions to a high probability jackpot state after the jackpot game state ends. When transitioning to the high probability jackpot state, the high probability jackpot state is maintained until the 100 variable display cycles are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In this example, when the high probability jackpot state is controlled, the state is also controlled to a time-saving state.

A "sudden jackpot with a high probability of occurring" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot game state, and then transitions to a high probability of occurring after the jackpot game state ends. When the state transitions to a high probability of occurring, the high probability of occurring state is maintained until the 100 variable display cycles are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In this example, when the state is controlled to a high probability of occurring state, the state is also controlled to a time-saving state.

In this example, in the case of a "normal jackpot" or a "probable jackpot", the large prize opening is controlled to be open in each of the 15 rounds during the jackpot game until 29 seconds have passed or a predetermined number of game balls (10 in this example) have entered (therefore, the large prize opening is opened for a long period of time 15 times). On the other hand, in the case of a "sudden probable jackpot", the large prize opening is controlled to be open for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game (therefore, the large prize opening is opened for a short period of time twice). Therefore, in the case of a "sudden probable jackpot", it is virtually impossible to expect a prize to enter the large prize opening, and it can be made to appear as if the game has suddenly switched to a probable jackpot state.

As shown in FIG. 12-4(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a jackpot occurs, there is a 40% probability that it is determined to be a "normal jackpot", a 40% probability that it is determined to be a "probable jackpot", and a 20% probability that it is determined to be a "sudden probable jackpot". Also, as shown in FIG. 12-4(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a jackpot occurs, there is a 40% probability that it is determined to be a "normal jackpot", a 55% probability that it is determined to be a "probable jackpot", and a 5% probability that it is determined to be a "sudden probable jackpot".

(Time-saving type determination table)
FIG. 12-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time-saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 12-5(A) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 12-5(B) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 12-5(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is to be a time-saving miss symbol, in order to determine the time-saving type as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C," based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 12-5(B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is to be a time-saving miss symbol, in order to determine the time-saving type as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C," based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in Figures 12-5 (A) and (B), in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed and the time-saving effect is missed, and when the second special symbol is displayed and the time-saving effect is missed, there is a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "Time-saving effect Miss A," a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "Time-saving effect Miss B," and a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "Time-saving effect Miss C."

The example shown in FIG. 12-5 is just one example, and various methods for determining the time-saving type are conceivable. For example, when the first special symbol changing display determines that the time-saving type has failed, the probability of determining "Time-saving Fail C" is increased, while when the second special symbol changing display determines that the time-saving type has failed is increased, and so on. In this way, the rate of determining the time-saving type may be different when the first special symbol changing display is executed and when the second special symbol changing display is executed.

In addition, for example, if the system is configured to be able to determine whether the time-saving feature has been lost even during a time-saving feature that has been used for rescue time-saving features, the system may be configured so that the time-saving feature count counter, etc. is not overwritten uniformly even if the time-saving feature has been lost, or the system may be configured so that the time-saving feature count counter, etc. is or is not overwritten depending on the type of time-saving feature that has been lost.

Figure 12-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of time-saving. As shown in Figure 12-6, in this example, in the normal state, if "time-saving miss A" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times, if "time-saving miss B" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 50 times, and if "time-saving miss C" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 30 times. Also, in the time-saving state, if "time-saving miss A" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled until the next big win, if "time-saving miss B" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 200 times, and if "time-saving miss C" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times. Also, in the normal state and the time-saving state, if a rescue time-saving occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 800 times.

In this example, as described later, there is no case where the time-saving feature is determined to be a miss during the special probability state. Also, in this example, as described later, there is no case where the time-saving feature is determined to be a miss even during the time-saving feature due to the rescue time-saving feature. Also, in this example, as described later, after the time-saving feature is controlled to a time-saving feature of 800 times by the rescue time-saving feature, if a jackpot does not occur even after the 800 fluctuation displays have ended, the jackpot is again controlled to a time-saving feature of 800 times by the rescue time-saving feature (rescue time-saving feature). Therefore, the number of times the time-saving feature is controlled due to the rescue time-saving feature will essentially be until the next jackpot occurs.

Here, the rescue time-saving achievement rate for each set value will be explained. The rescue time-saving achievement rate is the rate at which the game is controlled to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving. The time-saving state via rescue time-saving is controlled by making n (800) fluctuations without being controlled to a jackpot game state, so the rescue time-saving achievement rate K can be calculated as follows.
K=(1-ML)n={(P-1)÷P}n
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of activations)

For example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 8.1%; if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/310, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 7.5%; if the setting value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.9%; if the setting value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.3%; if the setting value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.7%; if the setting value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the rescue time reduction achievement rate. This makes it possible to rescue the player even if the set value of the jackpot probability is low.

In addition, the method of controlling the number of time-saving times when the time-saving effect is not achieved is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12-6. For example, even if the same time-saving effect failure pattern is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times may be controlled to be the same at 100 times during both the normal state and the time-saving state. Also, for example, even if the same time-saving effect failure pattern is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times may be controlled to 100 times during the normal state, and to 0 times during the time-saving state (i.e., the time-saving state falls back to the normal state). In this way, various modes are conceivable for controlling the number of time-saving times when the time-saving effect is not achieved.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
12-7 and 12-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 108IW. Among these, FIG. 12-7(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for a jackpot. Also, FIG. 12-7(B) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table B for a miss in a normal state. Also, FIG. 12-7(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table C for a miss in a time-saving state controlled via a jackpot. Also, FIG. 12-7(D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for a miss in a time-saving state controlled via a miss in a time-saving state.

Also, FIG. 12-8 (E) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table E for a miss during a time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving. Also, FIG. 12-8 (F) and (G) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables F and G for a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before a rescue time-saving state. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 12-8 (F) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving state that is selected when the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less. Also, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 12-8 (G) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving state that is selected when the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more.

Figure 12-8 (H) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table H for when a player misses during a high probability state. However, in this example, even if the player is in a high probability state or a time-saving state, if the number of reserved memories is not 1 or more (if there are no reserved memories), the fluctuation pattern is determined using fluctuation pattern table B.

Figure 12-8 (I) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table I for a missed variable display that results in a rescue time reduction. Figure 12-8 (J) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table J for a jackpot variable display that results in a rescue time reduction.

As shown in FIG. 12-7(A), in this example, when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PB2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (B), in this example, if a miss occurs during normal conditions, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-7(C), in this example, if a miss occurs during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (D), in this example, when a time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (E), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figures 12-7 (C), 12-7 (D), and 12-8 (E), in this example, during the time-saving state, the rate at which fluctuation patterns PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), and PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortened fluctuation) are determined is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than during the normal state. Furthermore, even during the same time-saving state, during the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss, the selection probability of fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is 80%, which is higher than during the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is shorter. Furthermore, during the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving state, the selection rate of fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortened fluctuation) is 99%, which is higher than during the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is even shorter. With this configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the rescue time is shortened (i.e. when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the variable display is executed more frequently using variable pattern PA1-4 (ultra-shortened variable), shortening the period until the next jackpot is controlled, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

Also, as shown in Fig. 12-7 (C), Fig. 12-7 (D), and Fig. 12-8 (E), in this example, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (super shortened fluctuation) is 80%, which is higher than in Fig. 12-7 (C), and the average fluctuation time is shorter. Also, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, unlike the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the jackpot, there is no case where the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined, and there is no case where the super reach is executed. In other words, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, unlike the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the jackpot, there is no case where the super reach is executed at the time of the miss, and the average fluctuation time is shorter. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the time-saving is rescued (i.e., when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the super reach does not result in a miss, so the decline in interest can be suppressed. Also, the time until the next big win is controlled is shortened, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed. In this example, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, the super reach is not executed when there is a miss, but it may be configured to be executed. For example, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, the super reach may be executed at a lower rate when there is a miss than in the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the big win. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the rescue time-saving is started (i.e., when no big win has occurred for a long period of time), the rate at which the super reach will result in a miss is reduced, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-8(F), in this example, if the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less, if the number of reserved memories is within 10 fluctuations before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) is high at 95%. Also, as shown in FIG. 12-8(G), in this example, if the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more, if the number of reserved memories is within 10 fluctuations before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is high at 95%.

Also, as shown in Fig. 12-8 (F) and (G), if there is a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before the rescue time reduction, there is no case where the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) is determined, and the Super Reach is not executed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the Super Reach fluctuation display is executed in the period immediately before the rescue time reduction but does not result in a jackpot. Note that even if there is a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before the rescue time reduction, it may be determined to be the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β). For example, within 10 fluctuations immediately before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) may be determined at a lower rate when there is a miss than in the period immediately before the rescue time reduction (i.e., the period using the fluctuation pattern table C shown in Fig. 12-7 (C)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (H), in this example, if a miss occurs during a special probability state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figure 12-8 (H), in this example, during the special bonus state, there is a high probability of 90% that the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) will be determined, and the average fluctuation time will be even shorter than during the time-shortened state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (I), in this example, when the display is a rescue time-saving variable display and a miss occurs, the variable pattern is determined to be variable pattern PA3-1 (entering and missing). In other words, variable pattern PA3-1 (entering and missing) is not used for variable displays that do not result in rescue time-saving, but is a variable pattern exclusively for rescue time-saving, used only for variable displays (misses) that result in rescue time-saving. In this example, when the variable pattern is determined to be variable pattern PA3-1 (entering and missing), a time-saving entry performance (see, for example, FIG. 12-38 (G) and (H)) is executed to notify the player that the time-saving state (i.e., rescue time-saving) will be controlled, as described later. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the time-saving state has been entered and that the time-saving state will be controlled, and it is possible to increase the interest when the time-saving state is entered.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-8(J), in this example, when the display is a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction and does not result in a jackpot, the variable pattern is determined to be PA3-2 (seeming jackpot). In other words, the variable pattern PA3-2 (seeming jackpot) is not used for variable displays that do not result in a rescue time reduction, but is a variable pattern exclusively for rescue time reduction that is used only for variable displays (jackpots) that result in rescue time reduction. In this example, when the variable pattern PA3-2 (seeming jackpot) is determined, as described below, a display that is the same as the time reduction entry display (see, for example, FIG. 12-38(G) and (H)) that notifies the player that the time reduction state (i.e. rescue time reduction) will be controlled (see, for example, FIG. 12-41(H')) is executed, and then a display that notifies the player that a jackpot will be entered (see, for example, FIG. 12-41(H')) is executed. With this configuration, once the player realizes that the rescue time has been shortened, they are informed that they will hit a jackpot, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases their interest.

The method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figures 12-7 and 12-8 is just one example, and various modes are possible. For example, if the time-saving state is lost during the time-saving state and the state is controlled to be in the time-saving state again, the fluctuation pattern may be determined using the same table as the fluctuation pattern table C for losses during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot shown in Figure 12-7 (C).

Also, for example, only when the time-saving state continues until the next jackpot in the case of a time-saving miss (in this example, when time-saving miss A occurs during the time-saving state), the fluctuation pattern may be determined using the same table as fluctuation pattern table C for misses during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot shown in FIG. 12-7(C).

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (E), during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4, which is an extremely short fluctuation of 1.5 seconds, is high, and the speed at which the fluctuation display is consumed is fast, so there are few types of preview effects and pre-reading preview effects that can be executed. For example, during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, effects such as displaying an effect image at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, lighting up lamps or LEDs, outputting a specified sound effect or a sound that stops the fluctuation that is different from normal are executed.

In addition, this example shows a case where a fluctuation pattern table E is provided specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, but it is also possible to configure it so that, for example, without providing a fluctuation pattern table E specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined using a fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 12-7 (C)) for the time-saving state via a jackpot.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the variation pattern table F or G (see FIG. 12-8 (F) or (G)) is switched to, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the reach rate gradually decreases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases, or the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested only when the number of remaining fluctuations is a dividing line such as 100 or 200.

In addition, in this example, the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a miss, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state are configured to use different fluctuation pattern tables (i.e., the average fluctuation time is different), but this is not limited to the above. For example, the same fluctuation pattern table may be used in each case (i.e., the average fluctuation time is the same), or the average fluctuation time may be longer for the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state than for the time-saving state via a jackpot or a miss time-saving state.

(Performance control command)
12-9 and 12-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the performance control command sent to the performance control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 12-9 and FIG. 12-10, the command 80XX(H) is a performance control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. The performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 80XX(H), it controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is a performance control command (display result 1 specification command) (miss specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be a miss (no time reduction).

Command 9001 (H) is a performance control command (display result 2 designation command) (time-saving miss A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be time-saving miss A. Command 9002 (H) is a performance control command (display result 3 designation command) (time-saving miss B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be time-saving miss C. Command 9003 (H) is a performance control command (display result 4 designation command) (time-saving miss C designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be time-saving miss C.

Command 9004 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9005 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 6 designation command (variable jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a guaranteed jackpot. Command 9006 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 7 designation command (sudden guaranteed jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a sudden guaranteed jackpot.

Command 95XX (H) is a performance control command (rescue time reduction number 1 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (126 or less) until the rescue time reduction occurs. In this example, a value according to the remaining number of fluctuations (126 or less) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is 1, command 9501 (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 126, command 957E (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Note that in this example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is 127 or more, the maximum value 7F (H) is set in the EXT data, and command 957F (H) is uniformly sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

Command 96XX (H) is a performance control command (rescue time reduction number 2 designation command) that specifies the number of remaining changes (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs. In this example, a value corresponding to the number of remaining changes (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 100, command 9601 (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the number of remaining changes is 800, command 9608 (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

Command 97XX (H) is a performance control command (rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery) that designates the number of remaining fluctuations (in units of 100) until rescue time reduction occurs when power is restored. In this example, when power is restored, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery and transmitted. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until rescue time reduction occurs when power is restored is 100 or less, command 9701 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is between 701 and 800, command 9708 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction can be transmitted in units of one time up to 126 times, and when the remaining number is 127 times or more, it is transmitted in units of 100 times, but this is not limited to the above. For example, two commands may be transmitted in combination so that it is possible to transmit in units of one time even when the remaining number is 127 times or more.

Command A000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command A100 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A102 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command B000 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that specifies the end of a jackpot game.

Command B1XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying while the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display during a round during a jackpot game. The number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX." Command B2XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying after the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display after a round during a jackpot game (displaying the interval between rounds).

Command B400 (H) is a presentation control command (large prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening.

Command C000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C001 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C100 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has decreased by 1. Command C101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has decreased by 1.

Command E000 (H) is a presentation control command (normal state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when a jackpot game ends. Command E002 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when the time-saving state is lost. Command E003 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state during a rescue time-saving state. Command E004 (H) is a presentation control command (probability variable state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the probability variable state.

Command E100 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification start command) that specifies the start of a right hit notification. Command E101 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification end command) that specifies the end of a right hit notification.

Command F000 (H) is a presentation control command (a customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies the start of displaying a customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demo designation command is sent, for example, when no reserved memory is stored (i.e., when the total reserved memory number is 0) at the end of the pattern determination period and at the end of the big win game. The customer waiting demo designation command is also sent, for example, when the power is turned on (when either the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). In addition, for example, when transitioning to a setting change mode in which a setting change process is executed or a setting confirmation mode in which a setting confirmation process is executed, a setting value designation command is sent after the end of each mode, and then a customer waiting demo designation command is sent. In addition, when the recovery process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the customer waiting demo designation command is sent when none of the big win game, small win game, and special game are executed and no reserved memory is stored. As described below, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo designation command, if 10 seconds pass without receiving any other commands, such as a performance control command at the time of the start winning, it starts displaying a telop indicating that the rescue time-saving function is installed (in this example, whether or not to display a telop is determined by lottery). In addition, if 3 minutes pass without receiving any other commands after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, it starts playing a demonstration movie.

The command F1XX (H) is a performance control command (setting value specification command) that specifies the currently set setting value. Note that the value equivalent to the setting value is set in "XX".

When the presentation control CPU 120 (specifically, the presentation control CPU 120) mounted on the presentation control board 12 receives the above-mentioned presentation control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, it changes the display state of the image display device 5 according to the contents shown in Figures 12-9 and 12-10, changes the display state of the lamp, and outputs sound number data to the sound control board 13. Note that presentation control commands other than those shown in Figures 12-9 and 12-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12. For example, more detailed presentation control commands related to jackpot games and presentation control commands indicating the game status (for example, a presentation control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
12-11 is a flowchart showing a game control main process in the characteristic unit 108IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, steps S8 to S9, and steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when a presentation control command instructing recovery from power outage is sent in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter for counting the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs, sets a value according to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter, and controls to send a rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery to the presentation control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 controls to send command 9701 (H) as the rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery. Also, for example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 controls to send command 9708 (H) as the rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the recovery process is executed, the rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery is transmitted, and the remaining number of fluctuations until the current rescue time reduction is notified. In addition, a time saving rescue can be achieved by executing a variable display based on the reserved memory restored by the recovery process (i.e., the reserved memory stored before the power outage). This configuration can reduce the disadvantage to the player when a power outage occurs in a situation where reserved memory corresponding to a variable display that will result in a time saving rescue was stored before the power outage.

In this example, a command for specifying the number of times to shorten the time required for recovery is sent separately from the command at the time of recovery when the power is restored after a power outage, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, the EXT data of the command at the time of recovery (e.g., a command for specifying power on) sent in step S7 may be configured to be set to a value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the time shortening is reached, and then sent.

Also, when a presentation control command instructing initialization is sent in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS12). Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800". That is, in this example, after the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, if neither a jackpot nor a time reduction miss occurs even after 800 variable display cycles, the rescue time reduction is entered and the machine is controlled to the time reduction state. Note that, in this example, the initial value to be set in the rescue time reduction counter can be specified based on the presentation control command instructing initialization sent in step S9.

In this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but the present invention is not limited to this. The rescue time-saving counter may not be initialized when the RAM clear process is executed. For example, when the RAM clear process is executed, the time-saving flags A to C indicating the time-saving state, the time-saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state, and the reserved memory may be initialized, while the value of the rescue time-saving counter may be restored. In this way, the game can be started from the state where the value of the rescue time-saving counter of the previous day continues, so that the investment amount until the rescue time-saving is reached can be reduced and a configuration can be made that does not disadvantage the player. In addition, the rescue time-saving counter can be prevented from being intentionally initialized, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased.

In addition, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected as being on (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear process is executed, and the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is executed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 12-12 and FIG. 12-13 are flow charts showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) in the special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is checked. If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory number is 0 or not (step 100IWS52). Specifically, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0 or not. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 100IWS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 100IWS54).

In this characteristic part 108IW, the processing of steps 100IWS52 to S54 is executed, so that the display of the second special symbol changes is executed with priority over the display of the first special symbol changes. In other words, the second start condition for starting the display of the second special symbol changes is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for starting the display of the first special symbol changes.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to, for example, execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the combined pending memory count by 1. That is, the count value of the combined pending memory count counter is decremented by 1 (step 100IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the combined pending memory count counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figures 12-2 and 12-3) with the random number for hit determination, and decides that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of jackpot determination. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating a probability variable state is not set (if the state is a low probability state), the CPU 103 performs the jackpot determination using the low probability jackpot determination value (see Figures 12-2 (A) and 12-3 (A)). Furthermore, if the probability flag is set (high probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using a high probability jackpot determination value (see FIG. 12-2(B) and FIG. 12-3(B)). If the value of the random number for jackpot determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 12-2 and FIG. 12-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined that a jackpot has occurred (Y in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has occurred (step 100IWS64). The CPU 103 then determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, guaranteed jackpot, or sudden guaranteed jackpot) that corresponds to the value that matches the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 100IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not decided to hit the jackpot (N in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time-saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state is 0 (step 100IWS66). If the value of the time-saving counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter (step 100IWS67) and checks whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS68). If the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the variable ends (step 100IWS69).

In this example, steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed to perform the subtraction process of the time-saving counter before the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 100IWS70, but the processing is not limited to this. For example, the subtraction process of the time-saving counter may be executed after the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 100IWS70. In this case, for example, in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time-saving counter to "800" (see step 100IWS172), the value of the time-saving counter will be subtracted by 1 extra, so in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief, the value of the time-saving counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process. Also, the time-saving counter may be set to "901", which is 1 more than the previous value, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS70). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 100IWS71). In this example, the process of step 100IWS71 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time reduction state, or the probability change state. In this example, the process of step 100IWS71 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the first special symbol variable display is executed or the second special symbol variable display is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS73). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9501 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 957E (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS74). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that the rescue time reduction has occurred and that the time reduction state will be controlled at the end of the fluctuation (step 100IWS75). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets 7F (H) uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send the command 957F (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS76). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 100IWS77). Note that whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter in the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS78). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9601 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9608 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and transmits a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and execute the teasing presentation, countdown presentation, and effect presentation described below.

In addition, for example, as described below, a rescue time reduction count counter is set (set to "800") at the timing of the rescue time reduction, and in a configuration in which rescue time reductions can occur consecutively, the rescue time reduction count 1 designation command or rescue time reduction count 2 designation command may be sent only the first time a rescue time reduction occurs, and the rescue time reduction count 1 designation command or rescue time reduction count 2 designation command may not be sent the second or subsequent time a rescue time reduction occurs.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the state is a time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, is set (step 100IWS79). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., the state is a time-saving state via rescue time-saving), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS79, if the state is a time-saving state via rescue time-saving, it is determined that the state is a miss without time-saving, without carrying out the process of determining whether the time-saving has been missed in step 100IWS81 and thereafter.

It is also possible to configure the system so that the time-saving state is not uniformly determined to be a miss, not only during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, but also during the time-saving state via a jackpot and during the time-saving state via a miss. In other words, not only when time-saving flag C is set, but also when time-saving flag A or time-saving flag B is set, the system may uniformly not perform the process of determining whether time-saving has failed after step 100IWS81, and it may be decided to simply treat it as a miss without time-saving.

Conversely, even during a time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the processing from step 100IWS81 onwards may be executed to determine whether or not the time-saving state has been exceeded. Also, it may be configured so that both rescue time-saving and time-saving deviations may occur in the same variable display. In this case, for example, it may be configured so that the time-saving state is controlled with priority given to rescue time-saving, or it may be configured so that the time-saving state is controlled with priority given to deviations from time-saving.

If the time-saving flag C is not set (i.e., the game is not in a time-saving state via rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., the game is in a high probability state), the game proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the processing of step 100IWS80, if the game is in a high probability state, it is decided that the game will be a miss without time-saving, without carrying out the processing of step 100IWS81 to determine whether the game has missed the time-saving state.

If the probability of winning is not set (i.e., if the probability of winning is not high), the CPU 103 uses a time-saving loss judgment table to determine whether or not the time-saving loss is determined, and performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment to determine whether or not the time-saving loss is determined (step 100IWS81). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time-saving loss judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss is determined to be a loss with a probability of about 1/400 (see FIG. 12-2). Also, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time-saving loss judgment table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss is determined to be a loss with a probability of about 1/200 (see FIG. 12-3).

If it is decided that the time-saving miss is to occur (Y in step 100IWS82), the CPU 103 decides on the type of time-saving miss (time-saving miss A, time-saving miss B, or time-saving miss C) that corresponds to the value that matches the value of the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 100IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and decides on the type of time-saving. Then, it proceeds to step 100IWS84.

In step 100IWS83, the time-saving type determination is performed using a type determination random number that is the same as the type determination random number used in the jackpot type determination in step 100IWS65. Furthermore, if it is configured to determine small wins as well as small win types, it is sufficient to configure it so that the determination process is performed using a common type determination random number not only for the jackpot type determination and the time-saving type determination, but also for the small win type determination.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time-saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a normal jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a probability jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", if it is determined to be a sudden probability jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "9", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "4", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "6", and if it is determined to be a miss (no time-saving), the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". The CPU 103 also stores the determined special symbol stop pattern in a stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 12-14 is a flow chart showing the variable pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process. In the variable pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (i.e., the variable display is a rescue time reduction and a jackpot), the CPU 103 selects the variable pattern table J for rescue time reduction variable jackpot shown in FIG. 12-8 (J) as a table for determining the variable pattern (step 100IWS1701B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table A for the jackpot shown in FIG. 12-7 (A) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (i.e., if it is a miss), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (i.e., if the display shows a change that results in a rescue time reduction and it is a miss), the CPU 103 selects the change pattern table I for the rescue time reduction change miss shown in FIG. 12-8 (I) as a table for determining the change pattern (step 100IWS1702B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 10 or less (i.e., if the number of changes remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 3 or less. In addition, the embodiment is not limited to the one shown in this example, and may be configured to check, for example, whether the value of the first pending memory count counter or the second pending memory count counter is 3 or less.

If the value of the combined reserved memory count counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table F for misses just before the rescue time reduction shown in FIG. 12-8 (F) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1705). If the value of the combined reserved memory count counter is 4 or more (N in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table G for misses just before the rescue time reduction shown in FIG. 12-8 (G) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1706).

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 10 or less (N in step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., if the game is in a high probability state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table H for a miss during a high probability state shown in FIG. 12-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., if there are no reserved memories), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for a miss during a normal state shown in FIG. 12-7 (B).

If the probability variable flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time-saving flag A is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table C for a miss when the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 12-7(C), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for a miss when in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 12-7(B).

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss), the CPU 103 selects the miss fluctuation pattern table D shown in FIG. 12-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the miss fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 12-7 (B) for the normal state.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table E for deviations during the time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (E), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1714).

If the time-saving flag C is not set either (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table B for misses in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7 (B) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 determines which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 12-7 and FIG. 12-8 to use based on the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the fluctuation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer (step 100IWS1716). In this example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. After the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern to which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among multiple fluctuation patterns.

Once the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

When the change time (change pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the change time data indicating the determined change time in the change time timer and starts measuring the change time (step 100IWS1718), and starts the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Special pattern variation processing)
12-15 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first controls the transmission of any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not to make it a jackpot, the decision result of the jackpot type, and the decision result of the time-saving type, if they have not been transmitted yet (step 100IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be missed (step 100IWS1124). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be missed can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 100IWS85.

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be over, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-hit LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1125). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a right-hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

In this example, when the processing of step 100IWS1125 is executed and a time-saving missing pattern is derived and displayed, the right-hit LED 100IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time-saving flag A nor the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 100IWS1128). The CPU 103 also controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a second pattern determination A designation command. Then proceed to step 100IWS1139.

If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., if the time-saving state is in effect), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "10 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 100IWS1130). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command or a second pattern determination B designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If it has not been decided that the time reduction should be lost (N in step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time reduction determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the rescue time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right hit LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1133). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

When the processing of step 100IWS1133 is executed, in this example, if the rescue time is shortened, the right-hit LED 100IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (step 100IWS1135). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If the rescue time reduction determination flag is not set (N in step 100IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "0.5 seconds" to the pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (step 100IWS1137). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination C designation command or a second pattern determination C designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination C designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination C designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern stop processing (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
12-16 and 12-17 are flow charts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 100IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132).

If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is not 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has not yet ended), the special pattern stop process ends. If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has ended), the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B, time-saving flag C, the probability change count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the probability change state, and the time-saving count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state (step 100IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "800" (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "800" in response to a jackpot, and if neither a next jackpot nor a time-saving miss occurs even after 800 variable display cycles have been performed after the jackpot game ends, the rescue time-saving state will be entered and the game will be controlled to the time-saving state.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 100IWS135, when a jackpot is hit, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot to initialize it, but this is not the only possible mode. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "800" during a round of jackpot play, or may be configured to be initially set to "800" at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot play.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right hit LED 100IW10 to start lighting up (step 100IWS136). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a jackpot start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the large prize opening to measure the time before the large prize opening is opened (fanfare time) until the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 100IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S144) (step 100IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time-saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time-saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving count counter to "800" (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as described later, when the time-saving state is triggered by the rescue time-saving, the state is controlled to a time-saving state of 800 times (see steps 100IWS172, S173). In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS143, S144, when the time-saving state is triggered by the rescue time-saving, the rescue time-saving count counter is set to "800" after 800 variable displays are executed without a big hit or a time-saving miss. Then, if the next big hit or time-saving miss does not occur even after 800 variable displays are executed, the second rescue time-saving state is triggered and the state is controlled to a time-saving state. Note that in this example, a time-saving miss does not occur in the time-saving state triggered by the rescue time-saving, but a time-saving miss may occur and when it does occur, the value of the rescue time-saving count counter may be reset (i.e., set to "800").

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the time-saving flags that have been set (any of the time-saving flags A to C) and ends the time-saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 100IWS150.

If the time-saving end flag is not set (N in step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the special chance count counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the special chance count counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153. If the value of the special chance count counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the special chance count counter (step 100IWS147) and checks whether the value of the special chance count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). If the value of the special chance count counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the special chance flag and the time-saving flag A, and ends the special chance state (step 100IWS149). The process then proceeds to step 100IWS150.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to end the illumination of the right-hit LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS150). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a right-hit notification end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153.

In this example, the process of steps 100IWS141 to S152 is executed to transition to the normal state and end the right hit notification at the end of the pattern determination period in the final time-saving or final high-variable fluctuation, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the system may be configured to transition to the normal state and end the right hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the pattern determination period in the final time-saving or final high-variable fluctuation.

In addition, in this example, the case where the special probability state ends and the time-saving state also ends at the final special probability state change is shown, but this is not limited to the case, and it may be configured so that only the special probability state ends and the time-saving state continues.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost (step 100IWS153). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 100IWS85.

If it is decided that the time-saving effect has been lost, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (step 100IWS154). If neither the time-saving flag A nor the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., if the normal state exists), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving effect counter to "100" (step 100IWS156) if the time-saving effect has been lost (Y in step 100IWS155). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss A is not met, but if the time-saving miss B is met (Y in step 100IWS157), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "50" (step 100IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss is not B (i.e., if the time-saving miss is C), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "30" (step 100IWS159). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., if the time-saving state is in effect), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time-saving counter to 0 (step 100IWS161) if time-saving has been disabled (Y in step 100IWS160). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss is not A, but B (Y in step 100IWS162), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "200" (step 100IWS163). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss is not B (i.e., if the time-saving miss is C), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "100" (step 100IWS164). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

Next, if the time-saving flag A is set, the CPU 103 resets it (step 100IWS165). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving flag B and controls the game to the time-saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "800" (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "800" when the time-saving miss occurs, and if neither the next jackpot nor the time-saving miss occurs even after 800 variable display cycles are performed after the time-saving miss, the rescue time-saving state is entered and the game is controlled to the time-saving state.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a time-saving state B designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

In this example, when the processing of steps 100IWS166 and S168 is executed and a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the game is controlled to the time-saving state at the end of the pattern determination period, and a time-saving state B designation command is sent to switch to a background image corresponding to the time-saving state via the time-saving miss.

If it has not been decided that the time-saving feature should be removed (step 100IWS153, N), the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-saving feature determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the rescue time-saving feature determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time-saving feature determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time-saving feature count counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the rescue time-saving feature count counter to "800" (step 100IWS172A). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving feature flag C and controls the game to the time-saving feature state (step 100IWS173). The CPU 103 also controls the game to send a time-saving feature state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS174).

In this example, the system is configured so that when the rescue time reduction occurs, the time reduction state is controlled and the rescue time reduction counter is set (set to "800"), allowing rescue time reductions to occur continuously, and once the rescue time reduction occurs, the time reduction state continues until a jackpot occurs, but this is not the only possible configuration. For example, when the rescue time reduction occurs, the system may simply control to the time reduction state without setting the rescue time reduction counter, and then set the rescue time reduction counter when the 800 fluctuation display ends and the system is controlled to the normal state (see step 100IWS144).

In addition, in this example, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is subtracted by one each time the variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction occurs when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes "0", but this is not limited to the above. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "0", and the value of the rescue time reduction counter may be added by one each time the variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction occurs when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes "800".

In addition, in this example, the pattern determination period is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than usual, when the rescue time is shortened, to ensure a period for effects such as mode transition effects, but during the pattern determination period, the image display device 5 may be configured not to display decorative patterns, but to display only small patterns, so that the small patterns are not hidden by special effects or the like.

In addition, in this example, the processing of step 100IWS172 is executed to set the number of time-saving times to 800, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until a rescue time-saving occurs, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in step 100IWS172, the time-saving times counter may be set to a value greater than "800," or a value less than "800."

In addition, in step 100IWS172, the time-saving counter may be configured to be able to set values corresponding to multiple types of time-saving times. For example, the time-saving counter may be configured to be set to "100" if a rescue time-saving is performed the first time, and to be set to "800" if a rescue time-saving is performed the second time.

Also, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times determined by the lottery process may be set in the time-saving times counter. In this case, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined to be 100 times with a 10% probability, or 800 times with a 90% probability. Also, when the number of time-saving times is determined by a lottery process, the number of time-saving times may be determined by using the type-determining random numbers used to determine the jackpot type and the time-saving time type, or the number of time-saving times may be determined by using a dedicated random number.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(External output signal)
FIG. 12-18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output from the pachinko game machine 1. As shown in FIG. 12-18, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game. The jackpot 2 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game and during a time-saving state. The jackpot 3 signal is a signal output during a pattern determination period when the time-saving state is not reached. The jackpot 4 signal is a signal output during a pattern determination period of a variable display that has become a rescue time-saving state. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal output at the start of a pattern determination period.

In this example, in addition to the case where the time-saving state is entered at the end of a jackpot game, the time-saving state may also be entered when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, so when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot 2 signal is initiated at the end of the pattern determination period. Also, the time-saving state may also be entered when a rescue time-saving state occurs, so when a missing pattern for a variable display that results in a rescue time-saving state is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot 2 signal is initiated at the end of the pattern determination period.

The jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the pattern determination period but also during jackpot play. In addition, while this example shows a case where separate external output signals (jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal) are output when the time-saving feature is missed and when the time-saving feature is rescued, a shared external output signal may be output.

The jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal may also be configured to be output at a timing after the fluctuation stop signal is output during the pattern determination period.

For example, the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the losing pattern, and the jackpot 3 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output, or the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, and the jackpot 4 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output. This configuration makes it possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the change stop signal and the jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal are output simultaneously.

The jackpot 3 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed. The jackpot 4 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a time-saving state where the time-saving function has been rescued. If configured in this way, it will be possible to appropriately determine the type of time-saving function even during the time-saving state.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 12-19 is a flow chart showing the jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 100IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and controls to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 100IWS534), and ends the process.

In step 100IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag A and controls the time-saving state (step 100IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot that is ending this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). Note that whether it is a normal jackpot or not can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 100IWS85. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "100" (step 100IWS539). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state A designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (i.e., if it is a chance jackpot or a sudden chance jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the chance jackpot flag and controls the state to chance jackpot (step 100IWS541). The CPU 103 also sets the chance jackpot count counter to "100" (step 100IWS542). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a chance jackpot state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state transition)
Next, the state transition in the feature part 108IW will be described. FIG. 12-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature part 108IW. As shown in FIG. 12-20, in the normal state, if a sure-variant jackpot or a sudden sure-variant jackpot occurs, the state is controlled to a sure-variant state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and in the normal state, the state is controlled to a time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Also, even if a miss occurs in the normal state, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to a time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving miss) (see step 100IWS166). Furthermore, even if a miss occurs, if a rescue time-saving state is reached (after the RAM clear process, or after a jackpot or a time-saving miss, if the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot or time-saving miss occurring), the game will be controlled to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (see step 100IWS173).

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-20, if a special jackpot or sudden special jackpot occurs during the special jackpot state, the player is controlled back to the special jackpot state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the player is controlled to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537-S539). On the other hand, during the special jackpot state, the time-saving miss pattern is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS80), and there is no rescue time-saving state. Also, during the special jackpot state, if 100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the player is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146-S149).

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time-saving state A, if a sure-win or sudden sure-win occurs, the state is controlled to the sure-win state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and in the case of a normal win, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) again (see steps 100IWS537-S539). Also, in the time-saving state A, even if it is a miss, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving miss) (see step 100IWS166). Also, in the time-saving state A, if 100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). On the other hand, there is no case where the time-saving state A becomes a rescue time-saving state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time-saving state B, if a sure-win or sudden sure-win occurs, the state is controlled to the sure-win state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and in the case of a normal win, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via a win) (see steps 100IWS537-S539). Also, even if there is a miss in the time-saving state B, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled again to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving miss) (see step 100IWS166). Also, in the time-saving state A, if the variable display has ended 30, 50, 100, or 200 times without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). However, if the time-saving state is in a state of failure A and the game is controlled to time-saving state B, time-saving state B will continue until the next big win occurs (see steps 100IWS160, S161). On the other hand, there is no case where the time-saving state B becomes a rescue time-saving state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time-saving state C, if a sure-win or sudden sure-win occurs, the state is controlled to the sure-win state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and in the case of a normal jackpot, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537-S539). On the other hand, in the time-saving state C, there is no case where a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). Also, in the time-saving state C, if 800 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled again to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (see steps 100IWS170-S173).

In this example, when a time-saving symbol that does not match the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed during time-saving state A, the state transitions to time-saving state B without exception, but the control is not limited to this. For example, the current remaining number of time-saving times may be compared with the number of time-saving times corresponding to the determined time-saving type, and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, the current time-saving state A may be continued as is.

In this example, if a normal jackpot occurs during time-saving state B, the game will automatically transition to time-saving state A; however, this control is not limited to this. For example, the game may be configured to compare the current remaining number of time-saving times with the number of time-saving times corresponding to a normal jackpot (100 times in this example), and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, the game will continue in the current time-saving state B.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the time-saving miss symbol is not derived and displayed during time-saving state C (see Y in step 100IWS79), but this is not the only possible configuration, and for example, it may be configured so that it is possible to determine that the time-saving miss is occurring even during time-saving state C.

In addition, in this example, when the game is controlled to enter the high probability state, the high probability state is ended based on the execution of 100 variable display cycles, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the game may be configured so that whether or not to end the high probability state is determined for each variable display by a lottery process, and the high probability state is ended based on the decision to end the high probability state.

(Performance control main processing)
Next, the operation of the performance control means will be described. Fig. 12-21 is a flow chart showing a specific example of the performance control main process in the characteristic unit 108IW. In Fig. 12-21, the processes of steps S71 to S76 are the same as those shown in Fig. 6.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes small symbol process processing (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process processing of step 087IWS701, the image display device 5 executes a variable display of small symbols that are reduced versions of the left, center, and right decorative symbols, in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbols, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the image display device 5.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fourth pattern process (step 100IWS702). In this example, the fourth pattern process in step 100IWS702 is executed, and the fourth pattern is displayed in synchronization with the first and second special patterns, separately from the decorative pattern. In this example, when the first special pattern is displayed, the fourth pattern is displayed in the fourth pattern display 100IW21a provided to the left of the image display 5. When the second special pattern is displayed, the fourth pattern is displayed in the fourth pattern display 100IW21b provided to the right of the image display 5.

The process of step S77 is the same as that of step S77 shown in FIG. 6.

When the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed, the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed by alternately turning on and off two LEDs arranged above and below in the fourth pattern display 100IW21a, 21b.

In addition, when the variable time ends, the stopped pattern of the fourth pattern is displayed as a confirmed pattern at the start of the pattern confirmation period. In this case, if there is a jackpot, the two LEDs arranged above and below are displayed as a jackpot pattern with the two LEDs lit in red. In addition, if there is a time-saving miss, the two LEDs arranged above and below are displayed as a time-saving miss pattern with the two LEDs lit in blue. In addition, if there is a miss (no time-saving), the two LEDs arranged above and below are displayed as a miss pattern (no time-saving) with the two LEDs turned off.

The form of the stopping pattern of the fourth pattern is not limited to the form shown in this example, and may be configured to derive and display the stopping pattern of the fourth pattern in a form that allows distinction of the type of jackpot or time-saving mode, for example.

In addition, in this example, a dedicated symbol is provided as the fourth symbol when the time-saving feature is lost, but this is not limited to the above, and the stopping symbol of the fourth symbol may be the same symbol when the jackpot is hit and when the time-saving feature is lost.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the operation of the performance control means will be described. Figures 12-22 and 12-23 are flow charts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The performance control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, and in the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command received buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether a command is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception counter with the read pointer. If the two match, no received command is stored. If a received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads out the received command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). After reading out the command, the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step 100IWS613). The increment of +2 is because 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received performance control command is a variation pattern command (step 100IWS614), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, it sets a variation pattern command reception flag (step 100IWS616).

If the received performance control command is a display result designation command (step 100IWS617), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 100IWS618).

If the received performance control command is any of the pattern determination designation commands (first pattern determination A designation command, first pattern determination B designation command, first pattern determination C designation command, second pattern determination A designation command, second pattern determination B designation command, second pattern determination C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the performance control CPU 120 sets the determination command reception flag according to the received pattern determination designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first pattern determination A designation command is received, the first determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination B designation command is received, the first determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination C designation command is received, the first determination C command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second pattern determination A designation command is received, the second determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, if a second symbol determination B designation command is received, a second determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, if a second symbol determination C designation command is received, a second determination C command reception flag is set.

If the received presentation control command is a jackpot start command (step 100IWS621), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received presentation control command is a jackpot end command (step 100IWS623), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify one rescue time reduction (step 100IWS625), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received command to specify one rescue time reduction in a command storage area formed in RAM 122 to specify one rescue time reduction (step 100IWS626).

If the received performance control command is a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command (step 100IWS627), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command in a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 100IWS628).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue during recovery (step 100IWS629), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display an initial result according to the number of times until the time for rescue is shortened based on the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue (step 100IWS630). For example, if the EXT data of the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue during recovery is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is shortened is 100 or less), the initial result is displayed as "112", indicating that the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is shortened is 100 or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue during recovery is "02 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less), the initial result is displayed as "223", indicating that the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "08 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until the recovery time reduction occurs is 701 or more and 800 or less), the initial result is displayed as "889," indicating that the number of remaining fluctuations until the recovery time reduction occurs is 701 or more and 800 or less.

In addition, this is not limited to the case where an initial result indicating the number of remaining changes is displayed when the power is restored. For example, the first change display after the power is restored may display a display indicating the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached, or a combination of symbols indicating the number of remaining changes. Also, for example, within 1 to 100 changes after the power is restored, a display indicating the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached, or a combination of symbols indicating the number of remaining changes may be displayed, so that a suggestive display is provided at a relatively early stage after the power is restored. Also, it may be configured not to suggest the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached by the initial result (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, the initial result may not suggest the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached).

If the received performance control command is a normal state designation command (step 100IWS631), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) (step 100IWS632).

If the received presentation control command is a command to specify time-saving state A (step 100IWS633), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) (for example, a yellow background image corresponding to sunset mode) (step 100IWS634).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify time-saving state B (step 100IWS635), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state B (a time-saving state after the time-saving state has ended) (for example, a green background image corresponding to forest mode) (step 100IWS636).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify time-saving state C (step 100IWS637), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (for example, an orange background image corresponding to the tangerine orchard mode) (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS633 to S638, different background images are displayed depending on whether the time-saving state is a jackpot state, a time-saving state through a missed time-saving state, or a time-saving state through a rescue time-saving state, even if the time-saving state is the same. This configuration makes it possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the game state, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and a common background image may be displayed regardless of whether the time-saving state is a jackpot, a time-saving state is a miss, or a rescue time-saving state. For example, a common background image may be displayed in steps 100IW634, 100IWS636, and 100IWS638, and a common background image may be displayed in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state is a miss, and the time-saving state is a rescue time-saving state.

If the received performance control command is a command to specify a special probability state (step 100IWS639), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image that corresponds to the special probability state (for example, a red background image that corresponds to the flame mode) (step 100IWS640).

If the received presentation control command is a right-hit notification start command (step 100IWS641), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 100IW20 to start lighting up (step 100IWS642). Note that in this example, the right-hit notification start command is sent at the start of the pattern determination period when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed or when a time-saving rescue is activated (see steps 100IWS1126, S1134), so the right-hit notification LED 100IW20 starts lighting up at the start of the pattern determination period.

If the received performance control command is a command to end the right-hit notification (step 100IWS643), the performance control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 100IW20 to end its illumination (step 100IWS644).

If the received performance control command is any other command, the performance control CPU 120 executes processing to store the received performance control command and set a flag corresponding to the received performance control command (step 100IWS645). For example, if a command designating a large prize winning slot is received, the large prize winning slot flag is set to indicate that a prize has been won in the large prize slot. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS611.

(Customer waiting demo performance control process)
12-24 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting demo performance control process. As described above, in this example, when the reserved memory is not stored (i.e., the total reserved memory number is 0) at the end of the pattern determination period and the end of the big win game, the main board 11 transmits a customer waiting demo designation command to the performance control board 12.

When a customer waiting demo designation command is received, if 10 seconds have passed since the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command without receiving any other commands such as a performance control command at the time of the start winning (Y in step 105IWS250), the performance control CPU 120 executes the caption display execution lottery process (step 105IWS251).

In this example, during periods when no variable display is being performed, it is possible to display a caption indicating that the machine is equipped with a rescue time-saving function. In step 105IWS251, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to display a caption.

Figure 12-25 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a caption display execution lottery table and a caption mode determination lottery table. Of Figure 12-25, Figure 12-25 (A) is a caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1," and Figure 12-25 (B) is a caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "6."

As shown in Figures 12-25 (A) and (B), in this example, the rate at which captions are displayed while waiting for customers varies depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. With this configuration, the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction can be indicated by the presence or absence of captions displayed while waiting for customers.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 12-25 (A) and (B), in this example, the setting value is configured to change the rate at which captions are displayed while customers are waiting. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the setting value is favorable based on whether or not captions are displayed while customers are waiting.

Note that in FIG. 12-25, examples of setting value 1 and setting value 6 are shown for the sake of simplicity, but a table corresponding to each setting value may be provided, or a table corresponding to multiple setting values (e.g., setting values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is decided to display the telop (Y in step 105IWS252), the performance control CPU 120 executes a lottery process to determine the telop display mode (step 105IWS253). Then, the telop display is started (step 105IWS254).

In this example, it is possible to display the telop in a red presentation mode and a blue presentation mode. In step 105IWS253, the presentation mode for displaying the telop is determined by lottery.

Figure 12-25 (C) is a caption mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1," and Figure 12-25 (D) is a caption mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "6."

As shown in Figures 12-25 (C) and (D), in this example, the presentation of the telop displayed while waiting for customers is configured to differ depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. With this configuration, the presentation of the telop displayed while waiting for customers can indicate the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 12-25 (C) and (D), in this example, the ratio of the presentation style of the telop display displayed while customers are waiting varies depending on the setting value. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the setting value is set to an advantageous value based on the presentation style of the telop display while customers are waiting.

Then, if three minutes have passed since receiving the customer waiting demo designation command without receiving any other commands, such as a performance control command at the time of the initial winning (Y in step 105IWS255), the performance control CPU 120 will play a demonstration movie (step 105IWS256).

Note that the display of subtitles while customers are waiting and the playback of demonstration movies will end when a performance control command is received at the time of the start of the winning.

Figure 12-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode for displaying subtitles. In the example shown in Figure 12-26, the screen transitions in the order of (A) (B) (C) or (A) (D) (E).

As shown in FIG. 12-26 (A), if the reserved memory is not stored when the pattern determination period has elapsed, a customer waiting demo designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Then, after the performance control board 12 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, if 10 seconds pass without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of the start winning, and it is decided to display a caption while waiting for customers, a caption is displayed on the image display device 5 indicating that the machine is equipped with a rescue time-saving function.

At this time, if it is decided to display the caption display in blue presentation mode, caption display 108IW001 with a blue border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 12-26(B) the border is white). Also, if it is decided to display the caption display in red presentation mode, caption display 108IW002 with a red border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 12-26(D) the border is filled in black).

Then, when three minutes have passed since the performance control board 12 received the customer waiting demo designation command without receiving any other commands, such as the performance control command at the time of the initial winning, the image display device 5 starts playing a demonstration movie. Note that, as shown in Figures 12-26 (C) and (E), the subtitle display continues to be displayed even while the demonstration movie is being played.

(Preview notice setting process)
FIG. 12-27 is a flowchart showing the advance notice setting process (step S161) in the performance control process shown in FIG.

In this example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101) in the special symbol process process, the occurrence of a start winning is detected, and a process is executed to store the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process is executed to predict the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. Then, after the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the pre-reading judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

In the pre-reading preview setting process (step S161), for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-reading preview performance are made based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether it has received a presentation control command at the time of the start winning (for example, a presentation control command for specifying the judgment results such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of reserved memories, and the look-ahead judgment) (step 108 IWS 701).

When a presentation control command for a start winning has been received, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether the number of reserved memories, including the reserved memory for which a presentation control command for a start winning has been newly received, is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction (step 108IWS702). In other words, it judges whether the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory newly stored due to the occurrence of a start winning is to be executed after the rescue time reduction has begun. Then, if the number of reserved memories is not greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory newly stored due to the occurrence of a start winning is to be executed after the rescue time reduction has begun, the advance notice setting process is terminated.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 108IWS702, it is possible to execute a look-ahead preview performance that predicts the variable display at the time of the rescue time reduction among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved memory stored before the rescue time reduction, while restricting the execution of a look-ahead preview performance that predicts the variable display after the variable display at the time of the rescue time reduction. In other words, it is configured to restrict the execution of a look-ahead preview performance across the rescue time reduction where the game status changes. This configuration makes it possible to avoid complication of the control processing and also to avoid inconsistencies in the presentation content.

If the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, i.e., if the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory newly stored due to the occurrence of a start winning is to be executed before the rescue time reduction, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance, and if so, the performance type and performance mode (step 108 IWS 703).

Figure 12-28 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a pre-reading preview performance execution decision table, a pre-reading preview performance type decision table, and a pre-reading preview performance mode decision table. In step 108IWS703, the tables shown in Figure 12-28 are used to decide whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance, and if so, what type and mode of performance to use.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a state other than time-saving state C, the system uses the pre-reading preview performance execution decision table shown in FIG. 12-28 (A) to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, and when the gaming state is time-saving state C, the system uses the pre-reading preview performance execution decision table shown in FIG. 12-28 (B) to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance.

As shown in Figures 12-28 (A) and (B), in this example, the look-ahead preview effect can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot or a miss, and is configured so that the look-ahead preview effect is executed more frequently in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead preview effect suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this configuration, as shown in Fig. 12-28 (A) and (B), the time-saving state C is configured to have a lower rate of executing the pre-reading preview performance when the display result is a miss than in game states other than the time-saving state C. With this configuration, in the case of the time-saving state C (i.e., when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the pre-reading preview performance is executed but does not result in a jackpot.

In step 108IWS703, when it is decided to execute a look-ahead preview performance, if the gaming state is a state other than time-saving state C, the type of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance type decision table shown in FIG. 12-28(C), and if the gaming state is time-saving state C, the type of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance type decision table shown in FIG. 12-28(D). Specifically, the type of performance is decided to be either a chance eye performance or a hold change performance.

The chance eye effect is an effect that suggests that the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading preview effect will be a jackpot by displaying a chance eye (in this example, "778") as the display result of the variable display executed before the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading preview effect. In the chance eye effect, for example, an effect is executed that teases whether or not the display result will be a chance eye (in this example, "778"). Also, for example, when the chance eye effect is executed in a red performance mode, a red chance eye (in this example, "778") is displayed as a stopped display, and when the chance eye effect is executed in a blue performance mode, a blue chance eye (in this example, "778") is displayed as a stopped display.

The hold change effect is an effect in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead preview effect is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, suggesting that the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead preview effect will be a jackpot. Also, for example, if the hold change effect is executed in a red presentation mode, a red hold display is displayed, and if the hold change effect is executed in a blue presentation mode, a blue hold display is displayed.

Figure 12-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of each type of effect in the pre-reading preview effect. Among Figures 12-29, Figures 12-29 (A1) to (E1) show specific examples of chance eye effects, and Figures 12-29 (A2) to (B2) show specific examples of hold change effects.

When the chance eye effect is executed as a pre-reading notice effect, after the one variable display is started as shown in FIG. 12-29 (A1), the left and right decorative symbols are displayed as stopped as shown in FIG. 12-29 (B1) and (C1). Then, as shown in FIG. 12-29 (D1), an effect is executed to suggest whether the central decorative symbol will stop as a "7" that becomes the chance eye "778" or a "6" that does not become the chance eye "778". After that, as shown in FIG. 12-29 (E1), when the central decorative symbol stops as a "7" and the chance eye "778" is displayed, it is suggested that there may be a reserved memory in the reserved memory that corresponds to the variable display that becomes a jackpot. Note that after the provocative effect is executed, a symbol other than the chance eye "778" (for example, "768") may be displayed as stopped.

When a hold change effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, as shown in Figures 12-29 (A2) and (B2), when a start winning occurs, a new hold display is displayed in a display mode (e.g., red) different from the normal mode, suggesting the possibility that a variable display resulting in a jackpot will be executed based on the hold memory corresponding to that hold display. In this example, the display mode of the hold display is taken over as the display mode of the active display. Note that the hold change effect is not limited to the mode shown in Figure 12-29, and may instead be such that a new hold display is displayed in the normal mode, and then changes to a display mode different from the normal mode at any time before the corresponding hold display and active display end.

Figure 12-30 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue. Of Figure 12-30, Figure 12-30(A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via a jackpot, and Figure 12-30(B) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via a rescue. In the examples shown in Figures 12-30(A) and (B), it is assumed that the start winning occurs at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 12-30(A), when a chance eye effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, an effect is executed to tease whether or not the chance eye pattern will stop in the variable display executed from the time the start winning occurs until the variable display of the look-ahead target starts, and then the chance eye pattern is displayed stationary. Because such teasing effects are included, when executing a chance eye effect, it is necessary to ensure a predetermined execution period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one variable display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (A), when a hold change effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the display mode of the hold display (or active display) changes at the timing when the start winning occurs, or at any timing across multiple change displays from the time when the start winning occurs until the change display of the look-ahead target ends. The display of the hold display and active display in the changed display mode is then continued until the change display of the look-ahead target ends. In other words, when a hold change effect is executed, it can be executed at any timing from the time when the start winning occurs until the change display of the look-ahead target ends, and can further continue until the change display of the look-ahead target ends.

In this way, even in the pre-reading preview performance, the chance eye performance and the hold change performance have different execution periods. In other words, the chance eye performance is executed for a specified period (e.g., 2 seconds) during one variable display, whereas the hold change performance is executed over multiple variable displays.

As mentioned above, in the time-saving state via the jackpot, the ultra-shortened variation (1.5 seconds) is not executed when you miss, and the shortened variation (5 seconds) is mainly executed, but in the time-saving state via the rescue, the ultra-shortened variation (1.5 seconds) is mainly executed when you miss. Therefore, as shown in Figure 12-30, in the time-saving state via the rescue, it is difficult to secure a period for executing the chance eye effect.

In this example, as shown in Figures 12-28 (C) and (D), in the time-saving state via a jackpot, both the chance eye effect and the reserve change effect can be executed as the look-ahead preview effect, while in the time-saving state via a rescue, the execution of the chance eye effect is restricted, and only the reserve change effect can be executed as the look-ahead preview effect. With this configuration, the look-ahead preview effect can be executed appropriately according to the game state.

In addition, in step 108IWS703, when it is decided to execute a look-ahead preview performance, if the gaming state is a state other than time-saving state C, the performance mode of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance mode decision table shown in FIG. 12-28(E), and if the gaming state is time-saving state C, the performance type of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance type decision table shown in FIG. 12-28(D). Specifically, it is decided to be either a red performance mode or a blue performance mode.

As shown in Figures 12-28 (E) and (F), in this example, the look-ahead preview performance can be executed using the red performance mode and the blue performance mode, and is configured so that the probability of executing the look-ahead preview performance using the red performance mode is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance using the red performance mode suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

In this configuration, as shown in Fig. 12-28 (E) and (F), when in time-saving state C, the pre-reading preview performance is executed only in the red performance mode. With this configuration, when in time-saving state C (i.e. when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the pre-reading preview performance is executed in the blue performance mode, which has a low jackpot expectation. In this example, when in time-saving state C, the pre-reading preview performance is executed only in the red performance mode, but when there is a miss, there is a 99% chance that the pre-reading preview performance is not executed. Therefore, it is configured to prevent frequent cases where the pre-reading preview performance is executed in the red performance mode but the display result is a miss.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in Figure 12-28, the execution ratio of the pre-reading preview performance, the ratio of performance types and performance modes can be made different between when the time-saving state C is in effect (i.e. when no jackpots have occurred for a long period of time) and when the time-saving state C is not in effect, thereby increasing interest.

In this example, as described below, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs falls to 10 or less, the execution of the preview performance is restricted (only preview performances with high expectations may not be executed), but the execution of the look-ahead preview performance may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution rate of the look-ahead preview performance in the case of a miss may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution rate of the look-ahead preview performance of a type with high expectations may be reduced (or not executed).

In addition, without being limited to the example shown in FIG. 12-28, for example, even in time-saving state C, if a variable display is executed that indicates a jackpot or a time-saving miss, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance may not be restricted.

When the processing of step 108IWS704 is completed, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of the pre-read preview performance based on the determined content (step 108IWS704). For example, if it is determined that a chance eye performance is to be executed, in step 108IWS704, the chance eye flag is set as the execution setting for the chance eye performance. Then, in steps 108IWS809-S810 of the variable display start setting process described below, if the chance eye flag is set, the chance eye performance is executed by selecting a process table that includes the chance eye performance. The chance eye flag is reset when the variable display immediately before the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading is executed.

For example, if it is decided to execute a hold change presentation, in step 108 IWS704, the hold change presentation is executed by changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the command at the time of the start winning.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 12-31 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out a variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 100IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 100IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 100IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 100IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates a "normal jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same even numbers as the stopping symbols (normal jackpot pattern). If the received display result designation command indicates a "probable jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same odd numbers as the stopping symbols (probable jackpot pattern). If the received display result designation command indicates a "sudden probable jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns of "135" as the stopping symbols (sudden probable jackpot pattern).

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols with two matching symbols on the left and right is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the missing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving effect. Also, if a setting is made to execute a chance eye effect, a combination of decorative symbols of the chance eye symbol (in this example, "778") is determined.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for the decorative patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a jackpot (a combination of the same patterns on the left, center, and right) are called jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a chance jackpot (a combination of the same odd-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called chance jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a normal jackpot (non-chances jackpot) (a combination of the same even-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called non-chances jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a miss are called miss patterns.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of a preview performance to be executed during the display of the fluctuation (step 108IWS802A). As a preview performance, for example, a timer performance can be executed in which a countdown is started after the fluctuation starts, and when the count reaches "0", a performance image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the execution setting of the timer performance can be set.

Figure 12-32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a preview performance execution decision table and a preview performance mode decision table. In step 108IWS802A, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction exceeds 10 times, the preview performance execution decision table shown in Figure 12-32 (A) is used to decide whether or not to execute the preview performance, and if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 times or less, the preview performance execution decision table shown in Figure 12-32 (B) is used to decide whether or not to execute the preview performance. Also, when it is decided to execute the preview performance, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction exceeds 10 times, the preview performance mode decision table shown in Figure 12-32 (C) is used to decide the performance mode of the preview performance, and if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the preview performance mode decision table shown in Figure 12-32 (D) is used to decide the performance mode.

As shown in Figures 12-32 (A) and (B), in this example, the preview effect can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot or a miss, and is configured so that the preview effect is executed more frequently in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the preview effect suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in Figs. 12-32(A) and (B), in this configuration, the rate at which the preview effect is executed is lower in a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). This configuration makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed but does not result in a jackpot during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less and the countdown effect and effect effects described below are executed).

In addition, during a specified period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time reduction), the countdown effect and effect effects described below are executed, but by restricting the execution of the timer effect as a preview effect at this time, it is possible to avoid multiple numbers indicating the counter being displayed, and to prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in Figures 12-32 (C) and (D), in this example, a preview effect can be executed in a red presentation mode (e.g., a red presentation image is displayed) and a blue presentation mode (e.g., a blue presentation image is displayed), and the system is configured so that the probability of executing a preview effect in the red presentation mode is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of a preview effect in the red presentation mode suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-32(C) and (D), in this configuration, the rate at which the preview performance is executed in red presentation mode when the display result is a miss is lower in a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is executed in red presentation mode during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) but does not result in a jackpot.

In addition, if the device is configured to be able to execute multiple types of preview effects with different jackpot expectations, execution may be restricted only for preview effects of a type with a high jackpot expectation (for example, if jackpot expectation is classified into five stages, preview effects of a type with a jackpot expectation of the fourth stage or higher) during a specified period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when there are 10 or fewer times remaining until the rescue time reduction).

In addition, without being limited to the example shown in FIG. 12-32, for example, even if the number of remaining plays until the rescue time-saving feature is 10 or less, if a variable display is executed that indicates a jackpot or a time-saving feature failure, the execution of the preview performance may not be restricted.

As mentioned above, in this example, in the case of time-saving state C, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is restricted, but the execution of the preview performance may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution rate of the preview performance in the case of a miss may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution rate of the preview performance type with high expectation may be reduced (or not executed).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800 (step 100IWS803). Note that whether the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800 can be determined, for example, by checking whether a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a promotional performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 100IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100), a process table including a promotional performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations "100 times" is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "08 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 800), a process table including a promotional performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations "800 times" is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 0 (step 108IWS805). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 0 can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 0.

When the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether the display result is a jackpot or not (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry presentation that notifies the player that the rescue time reduction will control the player to the time-saving state (step 100IWS806B). With this configuration, the time-saving entry presentation can clearly notify the player that the rescue time reduction will control the player to the time-saving state, thereby increasing the player's interest when the rescue time reduction is reached.

On the other hand, if the display result is a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry pseudo presentation that notifies the player that a jackpot has been reached after executing a presentation of a common type to the time-saving entry presentation (step 100IWS806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812. With this configuration, the player is notified of a jackpot after first recognizing that the number of remaining changes until the time-saving rescue period has reached zero, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases their interest.

In this example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the time-saving feature has been changed is reached, a special time-saving feature change pattern for a jackpot is used to create a time-saving effect, but this is not the only option. For example, a full rotation effect (in other words, a jackpot is confirmed) in which the three decorative symbols change while remaining aligned may be executed, which is not executed unless the number of times the time-saving feature has been changed is reached. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and specialness, and to increase interest.

In addition, for example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the rescue time-saving fluctuations is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for a jackpot as usual may be used, or a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be used.

In this example, if the display result is a miss when the number of times the time-saving time is reached, a dedicated pattern for the miss of the time-saving time is used, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a pattern for a miss similar to that of normal time-saving time may be used, or a pattern for specifying a reach performance with a short time may be used. By configuring in this way, the pattern can be made common before and after the number of times the time-saving time is reached, and data capacity can be reduced. In this case, when the pattern determination period has elapsed, the time-saving state C is entered, and the image display device 5 is switched to a background image (in this example, an orange background image) corresponding to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via the time-saving time) (see step 078IWS638), so that the change in the background image can notify that the time-saving state is being controlled by the time-saving time.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is not 0, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less (step 108IWS807). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 108IWS808). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "0A (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10), a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the count number "10" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 1), a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the count number "1" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

In this example, when the number of remaining changes until a rescue change occurs is 10 or less, a countdown effect and an effect are executed. This configuration makes it possible to make the player look forward to a rescue change, increasing interest. It is also possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage by quitting the game just before a rescue change occurs.

In this example, the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is determined based on the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and a teasing effect or a countdown effect is executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when a background designation command that designates a background image is transmitted, the EXT data of the background designation command may be set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs and transmitted. The performance control CPU 120 may then determine the remaining number of changes based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and execute a teasing effect or a countdown effect.

In this example, when the number of remaining changes until the rescue change is 10 or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect are always executed, but it may be determined by lottery whether they are executed or not. For example, when the number of remaining changes until the rescue change is not 10 or less, it may be determined by lottery whether a so-called fake countdown effect and effect effect (for example, executed in a manner common to the countdown effect and the effect effect, but is interrupted midway without continuing until the count number "0" is reached. See FIG. 12-42) is executed or not. In this case, it may be configured so that the rate at which the countdown effect and the effect effect (including real and fake) are executed is higher when the number of remaining changes until the rescue change is 10 or less than when it is not 10 or less. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player expect a rescue change and increase the interest. It is also possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage by ending the game just before the rescue change.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 10 or less (N in step 108IWS807), the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether the chance eye presentation has been set to be executed (step 108IWS809), and if the chance eye presentation has been set to be executed, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including the chance eye presentation (including a presentation that suggests whether or not a chance eye will be generated) (step 108IWS810). Note that if the chance eye presentation has not been set to be executed, it may be possible to determine by lottery whether or not to execute a presentation in which the chance eye pattern is not displayed after the presentation that suggests whether or not a chance eye will be generated (a so-called false chance eye presentation).

If the chance eye effect is not set to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 12. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 108IWS813). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 108IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Variable display performance processing)
12-33 and 12-34 are flow charts showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is set to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 100IWS844). In addition, the control state for the performance device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step 100IWS845).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation A command reception flag or the second confirmation A command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the mode transition performance (a performance that notifies the player of a transition to a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-hit notification (step 100IWS847). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS849). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, it proceeds to step 100IWS862.

In this example, when the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time-saving function has missed during normal operation and cases where the time-saving function has rescued. In step 100IWS847, if the time-saving function has missed during normal operation, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for time-saving function misses and the right-hit notification is selected, and if the time-saving function has rescued, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for rescue time-saving function and the right-hit notification is selected. Whether the time-saving function has rescued and the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the EXT data of the received rescue time-saving count 1 designation command is "00 (H)".

If neither the first pattern confirmation A designation command nor the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received (step 100IWS851). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation B command reception flag or the second confirmation B command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the continuation performance (a performance that notifies the user that the time-saving state will continue) (step 100IWS852). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS854). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS862.

If neither the first pattern determination B designation command nor the second pattern determination B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern determination C designation command or the second pattern determination C designation command has been received (step 100IWS856). Specifically, it checks whether the first determination C command reception flag or the second determination C command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern determination C designation command or the second pattern determination C designation command has been received, it proceeds to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first pattern determination C designation command nor the second pattern determination C designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first pattern determination C designation command or the second pattern determination C designation command is received (Y in step 100IWS856), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y in step 100IWS857), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the normal pattern determination display (step 100IWS858). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS860). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 100IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS862.

In this example, in addition to when a pattern determination command is received, if the variable time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the process proceeds to step 100IWS858 and onwards and the pattern determination period begins. However, normally, unless a pattern determination command is missed, step 100IWS857 will be judged as Y and the process will not proceed to step 100IWS858 and onwards.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 100IWS862).

(Waiting for special drawing)
FIG. 12-35 is a flow chart showing the waiting process for a special drawing (step S173) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the waiting process for a special drawing, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the determined performance period timer (step 100IWS871), and checks whether the value of the determined performance period timer after subtraction has timed out (step 100IWS872). If the value of the determined performance period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS873), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data n) (step 100IWS874).

When the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the performance control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). The performance control CPU 120 also sets the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the decorative symbol stopping pattern is being displayed as a finalized pattern (step 100IWS878). If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is being displayed as a finalized pattern, the processing ends. If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is not being displayed as a finalized pattern, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stopping pattern (missing pattern (no time reduction), time reduction missing pattern, or jackpot pattern) (step 100IWS879).

If the jackpot pattern is displayed as stopped in step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the presentation control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot pattern has been confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed performance period timer after subtraction has timed out (i.e., the pattern fixed period has elapsed), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start command has been received (step 100IWS883). Note that whether a jackpot start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a jackpot start command reception flag (see step 100IWS622) is set. If a jackpot start command has not been received, the process ends.

If a jackpot start command has been received, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance selects a process table according to the mode transition performance (performance that notifies the player of a transition to a probability change state (probability change mode) or a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the performance during the jackpot, including a right-hit notification (step 100IWS885). Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 100IWS886), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS887).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the jackpot (step 100IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (i.e., if a losing symbol (no time reduction) or a time-reduction losing symbol is stopped and displayed), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 100IWS889).

(Performance execution timing)
Next, the timing of the effect when the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction is executed will be described. FIG. 12-36 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of the effect when the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction is executed. As shown in FIG. 12-36, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction (the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1), the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern is ended, and when the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for a pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display (see steps 100IWS74, S75), the time reduction entry effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special pattern (see step 108IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the losing symbol (without time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing symbol (without time reduction) is displayed as a confirmed symbol for a symbol determination period of 20 seconds (see step 100IWS1135). Also, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 12-36, a mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 12-36, a right-hit notification is started in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when the symbol determination period has elapsed, the time reduction state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 12-36, the background image (in this example, an orange display color background image) corresponding to the time reduction state C (a time reduction state via a rescue time reduction) is switched to in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS638). With this configuration, a period of time can be secured for notifying the player that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) will begin in the normal state, thereby clarifying the presentation when switching game states and increasing interest.

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving, will be described. Figures 12-37 to 12-40 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to the time-saving state. In Figures 12-37 to 12-40, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIG. 12-37(A), the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction is displayed every 100 spins when the symbols stop. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, when there are 800 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols "134") is derived and displayed. At this time, the remaining spin number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left, saying "800 spins left until rescue time reduction begins!". At this time, an explanation of the rescue time reduction (for example, an explanation of the rescue time reduction function and the effects during the rescue time reduction) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 100IW103. With this configuration, the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine equipped with the rescue time reduction can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-37(B), for example, when there are 700 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, the symbol combination "423") is derived and displayed. At this time, as in FIG. 12-37(A), the remaining spins display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner, stating "700 spins left until rescue time-saving mode begins!". Also, at this time, an explanation of the rescue time-saving mode (for example, an explanation of the rescue time-saving function and the effects of the rescue time-saving mode) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 100IW103.

In this example, as shown in Figures 12-37 (A) and (B), a teasing effect suggesting the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is performed every 100 changes, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the teasing effect may be configured not to be performed when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is between 400 and 800, but to be performed when the number of remaining changes is 300 or less (i.e., the remaining number of changes is 300, 200, or 100).

In addition, instead of necessarily executing the teasing effect when the number of remaining fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command specifying the number of rescue time reductions to be 2 is received, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed, and if it is decided to execute the teasing effect, the teasing effect is executed in the manner shown in Figures 12-37 (A) and (B). In this case, it is desirable to configure so that the execution rate of the teasing effect increases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases.

As shown in Figures 12-37(C) to 12-38(E), when there are 10 spins remaining before the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, a countdown display 100IW104A is displayed in the center of the screen according to the number of remaining spins. For example, the countdown display 100IW104A shows a countdown from "10" to "1" each time the display of the changing patterns ends and the patterns stop. Each figure shows an example of a losing pattern (in this example, a combination of the patterns "653", "844", and "123") being derived and displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-37(C) to 12-38(E), when there are 10 or more spins remaining before the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the effect display 100IW104B is displayed in a range that corresponds to the number of remaining spins. In this example, as the number of remaining spins decreases (i.e., as the rescue time-saving mode approaches), the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (E), when there is one spin left until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode occurs, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a varying manner, and the patterns stop and a losing pattern (in this example, the pattern combination "123") is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-38(F), when there are 0 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode and the display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 changes (i.e., the display of the changes that will result in the rescue time-saving mode) starts, a time-saving entry effect is started to notify the player that the mode will be controlled to the time-saving mode (rescue time-saving mode), as shown in FIG. 12-38(G), and the time-saving entry effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. This configuration makes it possible to clearly notify the player that the mode will be controlled to the time-saving mode (rescue time-saving mode), and it is possible to increase the player's interest when the mode is controlled to the time-saving mode (rescue time-saving mode).

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-38(G), when the time-saving entry performance starts, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-38(H), when the symbols stop, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, the symbol combination "254") is derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving entry performance, notifications that are generally made during the ending period of the first win, such as a warning to not forget to remove the prepaid card or a warning to prevent addiction, may be made, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed. In this case, when making notifications during the time-saving entry performance, the notifications may be made in the same manner as when making notifications during the ending period of the first win, or may be made in a simplified manner. Furthermore, these notifications may not be made during the time-saving entry performance, but may be made during the ending period of the first big win after transitioning to the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving.

As shown in FIG. 12-39(I), when the pattern determination period begins, the mode effect start display 100IW105 "Super Hot!" is displayed, and the mode transition effect begins. Note that from then on, even during the mode transition effect, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-39(J), when the mode transition presentation starts, an operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, which suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 12-1). For example, the operation suggestion image 100IW106 displays the word "press" together with an image encouraging the pressing of the push button 31B.

As shown in FIG. 12-39(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the operation suggestion image 100IW106, the text display 100IW107 "V STOCK x 1" is displayed, notifying the player that the rescue time reduction will begin. In addition, the right-hit instruction display 100IW108, which instructs the player to hit to the right, is displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

In this example, even if a jackpot is hit, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) can be configured to execute a presentation that displays the text display "V STOCK x 1" in the same manner as in FIG. 12-39 (K). In this case, for example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment process to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit and the type of fluctuation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead judgment result designation command that can identify the look-ahead judgment result. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a presentation (so-called reserved consecutive presentation) in the same manner as in FIG. 12-39 (K) based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one item in the reserved memory that will be a jackpot based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the reserved consecutive presentation is executed by displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1". Also, for example, if it is determined based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command that there are two jackpots in the reserved memory, the text display "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to execute the reserved consecutive performance.

On the other hand, when the rescue time reduction is activated, there is a high probability that the extremely short change display time of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction (see FIG. 12-8 (E)). Therefore, the change display will be consumed very quickly and a jackpot is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, during the change display that has been activated by the rescue time reduction (in this example, the pattern determination period), the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 12-39 (K) is executed without checking the results of the pre-reading judgment. Therefore, the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 12-39 (K) is an effect in the same manner as the pseudo-reserved consecutive effect, and is an effect that notifies the user that the rescue time reduction has been activated.

The example shows a case where the right hit instruction display 100IW108 starts to be displayed from the timing of the display of the text display 100IW107 "V STOCK x 1", but the timing of the start of the display of the right hit instruction display 100IW108 is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the right hit instruction display 100IW108 may start to be displayed from the timing of the confirmation display of the stop pattern shown in FIG. 12-38 (H), and various modes are possible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39 (L), a mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed to select the presentation mode for the rescue time reduction. For example, a screen to select one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. Note that if a predetermined time has passed without selecting a presentation mode, the presentation mode that the cursor is aligned with is automatically confirmed. Also, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right hit instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-40 (M), when the selection of the presentation mode is completed, a start notification screen 100IW110 is displayed to notify the user that the rescue time-saving mode will begin. For example, the words "Rescue time-saving mode entering" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation begins, the game transitions to time-saving state C, and the rescue time-saving mode begins.

Next, we will explain the presentation style of the time-saving feature. Figure 12-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation style of the time-saving feature. The example shown in Figure 12-41 is carried out following the examples in Figures 12-37 (A) to (D).

As shown in Figure 12-41 (E), when there is one spin left until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode occurs, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a varying manner, and then the patterns stop and a losing pattern (in this example, the pattern combination "123") is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (F'), there are 0 spins remaining until the transition to rescue time-saving mode, and the display of decorative pattern 100IW100 and small pattern 100IW101 begins to change. Note that although this change indicates that rescue time-saving mode has been established, the display result is a jackpot. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, the game will transition to a jackpot game without transitioning to a time-saving mode due to rescue time-saving mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-41(G'), the time-saving entry appearance effect starts, and the time-saving entry appearance display 100IW104C in the same manner as the time-saving entry appearance effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that, as shown in FIG. 12-41(G'), when the time-saving entry appearance effect starts, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed, just as when the time-saving entry appearance effect starts.

As shown in FIG. 12-41(H), when the display of the time-saving entry performance display 100IW104C ends, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed when the symbols stop, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (the symbol combination of "254" in this example) is derived and displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stops, and the jackpot symbol (the symbol combination of "777" in this example) is derived and displayed. Then, the game moves to the jackpot game. With this configuration, the player is notified of the jackpot after first recognizing that the rescue time-saving has been established, which gives the player an element of surprise and increases interest.

When the configuration of this feature unit 108IW is applied to a gaming machine that is also configured to execute a special feature game in which control is made to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the special feature during a small win game, when the display result of the variable display that results in a rescue time-saving feature is a small win, a time-saving entry appearance effect may be executed to notify the player that a small win has occurred.

Next, we will explain the performance aspects of so-called fake countdown performances and effect performances. Figure 12-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of the performance aspects of so-called fake countdown performances and effect performances.

As shown in Figures 12-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, a so-called false countdown effect is executed, and a countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the number of remaining spins being 10 is displayed in the center of the screen. Then, each time the display of the changing patterns ends and the patterns stop, a countdown from "10" is displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, a so-called false effect is executed, and the effect display 100IW104B is displayed in a range corresponding to the number of remaining spins being 10. Then, each time the display of the changing patterns ends and the patterns stop, the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-42(E), the countdown display 100IW104A and the effect display 100IW104B are terminated before the remaining number of spins until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode is displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where there is one spin remaining. At this time, since the remaining number of spins until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode is not 0, the time-saving entry effect is not executed.

When the so-called fake countdown and effect effects shown in FIG. 12-42 can be configured to be executable, it is also possible to prevent the execution of teasing effects that suggest the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction, as shown in FIG. 12-37 (A) and (B). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish whether the countdown display 100IW104A or the effect display 100IW104B is real or fake when it is displayed.

In this example, when the pattern stops, the remaining number of spins until the rescue time-saving feature and the explanation of the effects during the rescue time-saving feature and a countdown are displayed, but this may also be done when the pattern starts to change or while it is changing.

In addition, in this example, a pattern determination period of 20 seconds is secured in the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, and a mode transition effect and right-hit notification are executed, but the pattern determination period may remain the usual 0.5 seconds, and the game may be configured to transition directly to the time-saving state via the rescue time reduction without performing a mode transition effect, etc.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time-saving counter is initially set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed, when a jackpot occurs, or when the time-saving function fails, but for example, when a story-based effect (such as a story reach effect or a story about whether to perform high-speed fluctuation) is configured to be executed, the selection buffer and story counter for that story may also be cleared. Also, it may be configured so that a story can be set when the rescue time-saving function is activated, or so that different stories can be set depending on the game state.

(Variation 1)
In the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, the pattern determination period in the variable display that is the rescue time reduction is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than the usual 0.5 seconds, and the mode transition effect and the right hit notification are executed during the pattern determination period, but the processing mode is not limited to this. For example, the pattern determination period may be set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a delay period until the start of the next variation is set, and the mode transition effect and the right hit notification are executed during the delay period. Below, a modified example 1 in which a delay period until the start of the next variation is set and the mode transition effect and the right hit notification are executed is described.

Figure 12-43 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in variant 1. As shown in Figure 12-43, in variant 1, the special symbol process processing includes the next change postponement processing (step 100IWS114) in addition to the processing shown in Figure 5. Note that in variant 1, the start winning determination processing (step 100IWS101) is executed in the same manner as the start winning determination processing (step 101) shown in Figure 5.

In variant 1, the normal special pattern processing (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0". Also, the variable pattern setting processing (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "1". Also, the special pattern variable processing (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". Also, the special pattern stop processing (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3".

In addition, the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4".

The pre-jackpot opening process (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". The during-jackpot opening process (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". The post-jackpot opening process (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". The end of the jackpot process (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8".

In addition, the small win pre-opening process (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". In addition, the small win opening process (step 100IWS120) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". In addition, the small win end process (step 100IWS121) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "11".

In the first modified example, the normal special symbol processing (step 100IWS110) and the variable pattern setting processing (step 100IWS111) are the same as the normal special symbol processing (step S110) and the variable pattern setting processing (step S111) shown in FIG. 5. In addition, in the first modified example, the special symbol changing processing (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stopping processing (step 100IWS113) are different from the special symbol changing processing (step S112) and the special symbol stopping processing (step S113) shown in FIG. 5 in that the symbol determination period is set to 0.5 seconds, the same as normal, even if the rescue time reduction occurs, and a first symbol determination C designation command or a second symbol determination C designation command is sent.

In addition, in the first modified example, the process before the big win opening (step 100IWS115) to the process after the small win ending (step 100IWS121) is the same as the process before the big win opening (step S114) to the process after the small win ending (step S120) shown in FIG. 5.

Figure 12-44 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) in modified example 1. In modified example 1, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those shown in Figures 12-16 and 12-17. In modified example 1, when the rescue time reduction determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets a value equivalent to a predetermined postponement period (20 seconds in this example) to a postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next fluctuation postponement processing (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). The processing of step 100IWS175 is the same as the processing shown in Figure 12-17.

Figure 12-45 is a flowchart showing the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) in variant example 1. In the next change postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and checks whether the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is not 0, the process ends.

If the value of the delay period measurement timer after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "800" (step 100IWS193) and sets the rescue time-saving count counter to "800" (step 100IWS193A). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving flag C and controls the time-saving state (step 100IWS194). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

In addition, in variant example 1, the next change postponement process transitions to the time-saving state when the postponement period until the start of the next change (20 seconds in this example) has elapsed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the next change postponement process may be configured to issue a right-hit notification and transition to the time-saving state at the start of the postponement period until the start of the next change or during the postponement period. In other words, the next change postponement process may be configured to control to the time-saving state and issue a right-hit notification, or it may be configured to only issue a right-hit notification without controlling to the time-saving state, and various other modes are possible.

In addition, in variant example 1, a uniform 20-second postponement period is measured in the next change postponement process, but this is not limited to this. For example, if a rescue time reduction counter is set (set to "800") at the timing of the rescue time reduction so that rescue time reductions can occur continuously, different postponement periods may be set for rescue time reductions in the normal state and rescue time reductions in the time reduction state. For example, when rescue time reduction occurs during the time reduction state, a shorter postponement period may be set and measured in the next change postponement process compared to rescue time reductions in the normal state, and the postponement period may be shortened for the second or subsequent rescue time reductions.

In addition, while the next change postponement process is being executed, the image display device 5 may be configured not to display decorative patterns, but to display only small patterns, so that the small patterns are not hidden by props or the like.

Moreover, in variant example 1, a case was shown in which the next change postponement process is executed to extend the period until the start of the next change when the time reduction is reached, but this is not limited to such a case, and it may also be applied to the display of a change that is not in the time reduction state, and the same next change postponement process as variant example 1 may be executed to extend the period until the start of the next change.

In addition, as described above, when applied to the variable display when the time-saving function is not activated, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIG. 12-17 may also be configured to be executed in the next variable postponement processing. If configured in this way, the pattern determination period of the variable display when the time-saving function is not activated can be made the same as the normal variable display at 0.5 seconds, and processing related to right-hit notifications, etc. can be executed in the same process as in the case of rescue time-saving functions, etc.

Figure 12-46 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of the performance when a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction in variant 1 is executed. As shown in Figure 12-46, in variant 1, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction (the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1), the variable display of the special and decorative patterns ends, and when a losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed stationary, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for a pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variable display in which the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the rescue time reduction occurs (see steps 100IWS74, S75), a time reduction entry performance is executed in the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special pattern (see step 108IWS806B). Then, when the display of the special pattern is finished and the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for the same 0.5 second pattern determination period as usual (see step 078 IWS1135). Next, when the 0.5 second pattern determination period ends, as shown in FIG. 12-46, the next change postponement period of 20 seconds is started (see step 100 IWS114). Then, during the next change postponement period, as shown in FIG. 12-46, a mode transition performance is executed in the image display device 5. Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the next change postponement period, as shown in FIG. 12-46, a right-hit notification is started in the image display device 5. Next, when the next change postponement period has passed, the time reduction state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 12-46, the background image (in this example, an orange display color background image) corresponding to the time reduction state C (time reduction state via rescue time reduction) is switched to in the image display device 5.

When configured as in variant 1, a change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the losing pattern, and after the pattern determination period has elapsed, a jackpot 4 signal may be output at the start of the next change postponement process (i.e., the start of the next change postponement period). The jackpot 4 signal here is a signal that is output to the outside during the next change postponement period after the pattern determination period of the change display that has become the rescue time shortening. This configuration makes it possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the change stop signal and the jackpot 4 signal are output simultaneously.

In addition, when configured as in variant example 1, a test signal or external output signal indicating that the player is in a gaming state in which it is expected that he or she will perform a right hit may be output at the start of the next change postponement process (i.e., the start of the next change postponement period), or a right hit notification may be initiated. With this configuration, it is possible to output a signal related to a right hit or to notify a right hit at the appropriate time.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, during the time-saving state controlled based on the rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 12-8 (E)) is uniformly selected to display the fluctuation of 1.5 seconds at high speed, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Below, modified examples 2 to 4 in which the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern during the time-saving state based on the rescue time-saving is different will be described. FIG. 12-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining modified examples 2 to 4 of the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern during the time-saving state based on the rescue time-saving, modified example 8-37.

First, a method of selecting a variation pattern during the time-saving state based on the rescue time-saving in the modified example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 12-47(A). In the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, regardless of whether 800 variation displays are executed after the RAM clear process (without a jackpot or a time-saving miss) or 800 variation displays are executed after a jackpot or a time-saving miss (without the next jackpot or a time-saving miss), the variation pattern tables F and G (see FIG. 12-8(F) and (G)) are uniformly selected 10 variations before the rescue time-saving, and a 5-second or 12-second variation display is executed at a high rate to execute the countdown effect and the effect effect, and after the rescue time-saving is entered and the time-saving state is controlled, the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 12-8(E)) is uniformly selected to execute a 1.5-second high-speed variation display, but this is not limited to such an embodiment.

For example, as shown in variant example 2 of FIG. 12-47, in the case where 800 fluctuation displays are performed after the RAM clear process and a rescue time reduction is achieved, even if it is between 10 fluctuations and 1 fluctuation before the rescue time reduction, fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 12-7(B)) is selected to perform the same fluctuation display as normal, and after the time reduction state is controlled based on the rescue time reduction, fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 12-7(C)) is selected to select a fluctuation pattern similar to the time reduction state when a jackpot is reached, and a 5-second fluctuation display may be performed at a high rate.

For example, as shown in modified example 3 of FIG. 12-47, in the case where 800 variable displays are performed after a jackpot is hit and a rescue time-saving period is reached, a variable pattern for rescue time-saving period misses (for example, variable pattern PA3-1) is selected from variable pattern table I (see FIG. 12-8 (I)) when the 800th variable display is performed, and a variable display with a variable time of 25 seconds is performed. Note that, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, the time-saving period entry effect is performed during the variable display, and the mode transition effect and right-hit notification are performed during the pattern determination period, but it may be configured to perform, for example, a mode transition effect and right-hit notification during the 25-second variable display (therefore, in this case, the pattern determination period may be secured for 0.5 seconds as usual).

In addition, in variants 2 and 3 of FIG. 12-47, the presentation can be made different by varying the selection rate of the change pattern in the change display that results in rescue time reduction between when rescue time reduction occurs after RAM clear processing and when rescue time reduction occurs after a jackpot, and the presentation can be made different by varying the selection rate of the change pattern in the change display after transitioning to a time-saving state via rescue time reduction.

Also, for example, as shown in variant example 4 of FIG. 12-47, it may be configured to select fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 12-7(B)) to display fluctuations in the same way as normal even when it is between 10 fluctuations and 1 fluctuation before the rescue time reduction, select fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 12-7(C)) during the time reduction state based on the first rescue time reduction to select a fluctuation pattern similar to the time reduction state when a jackpot is reached and display fluctuations of 5 seconds at a high rate, and select fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 12-8(E)) during the time reduction state based on the second rescue time reduction to display fluctuations of 1.5 seconds at high speed.

Example 2
Next, a gaming machine according to Example 2 in the characteristic unit 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 12-48 to 12-54. Note that, with regard to Example 2, differences from Example 1 will be mainly described.

In Example 2, in principle, the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs or the approaching rescue time reduction are not indicated. Therefore, in Example 2, a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the rescue time reduction, such as fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 12-8 (F) in Example 1 or fluctuation pattern table G shown in FIG. 12-8 (G) is not provided. In other words, if the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 12-8 (F) and (G) is used to determine the fluctuation pattern only immediately before the rescue time reduction, there is a possibility that the player will realize that the rescue time reduction is about to occur due to the tendency of the fluctuation pattern, but by not using such a fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing.

In addition, in Example 2, a variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that is also used for variation displays that do not result in rescue time reduction is used for the variation display that results in rescue time reduction, rather than a dedicated variation pattern for rescue time reduction. Therefore, in Example 2, a variation pattern table for variations when rescue time reduction occurs, such as variation pattern table I shown in FIG. 12-8 (I) in Example 1 or variation pattern table J shown in FIG. 12-8 (J) is not provided. With this configuration, it is possible to standardize the variation pattern when rescue time reduction occurs and before rescue time reduction occurs, and the data volume can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in Example 2)
Next, the fluctuation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 12-48 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table A for the jackpot shown in FIG. 12-7 (A) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (i.e., if it is a miss), the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., if it is in a high probability state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table H for misses during a high probability state shown in FIG. 12-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., if there is no reserved memory), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for misses during a normal state shown in FIG. 12-7 (B).

If the probability variable flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time-saving flag A is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table C for a miss when the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 12-7(C), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for a miss when in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 12-7(B).

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss), the CPU 103 selects the miss fluctuation pattern table D shown in FIG. 12-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for misses during normal state shown in FIG. 12-7 (B).

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table E for deviations during the time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (E), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1714).

If the time-saving flag C is not set either (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table B for misses in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7 (B) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 determines which of the variation patterns shown in Figures 12-7 and 12-8 will be used based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special pattern determination buffer (step 100IWS1716).

Once the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

When the change time (change pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the change time data indicating the determined change time in the change time timer and starts measuring the change time (step 100IWS1718), and starts the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer waiting demo performance control process in embodiment 2)
As described above, in the second embodiment, the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or the fact that the rescue time reduction is near is not indicated in principle. Therefore, although a telop indicating that the rescue time reduction function is provided is displayed based on the reception of a customer waiting demo designation command (see FIG. 12-26), the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or the fact that the rescue time reduction is near is not indicated by the presence or absence of this telop display or the performance mode. In other words, in the second embodiment, a telop explaining the rescue time reduction is always displayed in a common mode based on the reception of a customer waiting demo designation command.

In the second embodiment, it may also be possible to indicate the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or that the rescue time reduction is approaching, depending on whether or not a caption display is executed and the presentation mode. However, during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction occurs (e.g., a period when the number of remaining changes is 10 or less), it is desirable to limit the execution of the caption display (e.g., to execute it less frequently or not at all) compared to the previous period. By configuring it in this way, the background image changes suddenly when the rescue time reduction occurs (i.e., a notification that time reduction control due to the rescue time reduction is about to begin), providing a sense of surprise to the player and increasing interest.

(Variable display start setting process in the second embodiment)
Next, the variable display start setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 12-49 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 100IWS802).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of a preview performance to be executed during the display of the fluctuation (step 108IWS802A). As a preview performance, for example, a timer performance can be executed in which a countdown is started after the fluctuation starts, and when the count reaches "0", a performance image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the execution setting of the timer performance can be set.

Figure 12-50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the preview performance execution decision table and the preview performance mode decision table in Example 2. In step 108IWS802A of Example 2, regardless of the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, the preview performance execution decision table shown in Figure 12-50 (A) is used to decide whether or not to execute the preview performance. In addition, if it is decided to execute the preview performance, the preview performance mode decision table shown in Figure 12-50 (B) is used to decide the performance mode of the preview performance.

In Example 2, as shown in Figs. 12-50 (A) and (B), regardless of the number of remaining plays until the rescue time reduction, whether or not to execute a preview effect and the presentation style when executed are determined by a common ratio. Also, in Example 2, similar to Example 1, when the rescue time reduction is reached and the game moves to time reduction state C, the image display device 5 is configured to switch to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to time reduction state C (time reduction state via rescue time reduction) (see step 078IWS638). With this configuration, the change in the background image (i.e., the notification that time reduction control by rescue time reduction is about to begin) is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

As described above, in Example 2, the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or the approaching rescue time reduction are not indicated in principle, so the processing for executing teasing effects, countdown effects, and effect effects according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs, and the processing for displaying the initial result according to the number of times until the rescue time reduction occurs are omitted.

In the second embodiment, too, it may be possible to execute teasing effects, countdown effects, and effect effects according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is activated. However, during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction is activated (e.g., a period when the number of remaining changes is 10 or less), it is desirable to limit the execution of teasing effects, countdown effects, and effect effects (e.g., execution rate is reduced, or they are not executed at all) compared to the previous period. By configuring in this way, the change in the background image (i.e., the notification that time reduction control due to the rescue time reduction is about to begin) is executed suddenly, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

As described above, in Example 2, the variable display that results in rescue time reduction does not use a special variable pattern for rescue time reduction, but rather uses a variable pattern that is also used for variable displays that do not result in rescue time reduction (for example, variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variable)). Therefore, in Example 2, processing for executing a time reduction entry effect or a time reduction appearance effect is omitted. With this configuration, for example, after the variable display of variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variable) is performed, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time reduction control by rescue time reduction is about to begin) is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases interest.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Performance execution timing in Example 2)
Next, a description will be given of the timing of execution of the performance when executing the variable display that is the rescue time reduction in the embodiment 2. FIG. 12-51 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of execution of the performance when executing the variable display that is the rescue time reduction in the embodiment 2.

As shown in FIG. 12-51, the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction (the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1) ends when the special pattern and decorative pattern variable display starts and the special pattern variable time (e.g., 12 seconds) has elapsed, and when the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for a 0.5 second pattern determination period (see step 100IWS1137). Next, the variable display (see steps 100IWS74, S75) in which the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and results in the rescue time reduction also ends when the special pattern and decorative pattern variable display starts and the special pattern variable time (e.g., 12 seconds) has elapsed, as in the immediately preceding variable display, and when the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for a 0.5 second pattern determination period (see step 100IWS1137). Then, when the pattern determination period has elapsed, the game moves to time-saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 12-51, the image display device 5 switches to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) that corresponds to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (see step 100IWS638). This configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and prevent the presentation from becoming complicated. It can also clearly notify the player of the change in game state, which can increase the player's interest when the rescue time-saving state is reached.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-51, during the period in which the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., three times) after transitioning to time-saving state C, a right-hit notification is executed (see FIG. 12-52 (C1)). This configuration makes it possible to make the player aware that the game state is one in which right-hits are to be performed while preventing the presentation related to the transition to time-saving state C from becoming complicated, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages to the player.

(Example of performance in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving in the second embodiment, will be described. Fig. 12-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time-saving state. In Fig. 12-52, the performance screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In Example 2, as shown in FIG. 12-52(A), when the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction starts and the special pattern variable time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 12-52(B), the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed as a combination of the missing patterns.

Then, when the pattern determination period has elapsed and the next variable display begins, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (C1), the image display device 5 switches to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) that corresponds to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving), and a right-hit notification is executed.

If the reserved memory is not stored when the pattern determination period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (C2), based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, the image display device 5 may switch to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving), and a right-hit notification may be executed.

In addition, at the timings shown in Figs. 12-52 (C1) and (C2), explanations regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, explanations of the rescue time reduction function and the effects of the rescue time reduction) may be provided using the caption display 100IW103 as shown in Figs. 12-37 (A) and (B). In addition, no effects are executed indicating the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or that the rescue time reduction is near, but the caption display 100IW103 as shown in Figs. 12-37 (A) and (B) may be displayed at any timing. Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration shown in FIG. 12-52, the change in the background image (i.e., the notification that time-saving control through rescue time-saving will begin) is executed suddenly, providing a sense of surprise to the player and increasing interest.

In addition, changes in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, increasing the interest when a rescue time-saving feature is established. In addition, the fluctuation patterns can be standardized before and after a rescue time-saving feature is established, reducing data volume.

The presentation mode until transition to time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving mode in Example 2, is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12-52. For example, it may be something like modified example 1 shown in FIG. 12-53 or modified example 2 shown in FIG. 12-53.

(Example of performance in the second embodiment [Modification 1])
FIG. 12-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to the rescue time reduction in variant example 1 of embodiment 2.

In the first modified example shown in FIG. 12-53, as shown in FIG. 12-53(A), when the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is stopped and then the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is started, as shown in FIG. 12-53(B), a time reduction entry effect (blackout effect) is executed on the image display device 5, making it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before.

Then, when the special pattern change time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed, the blackout state is cleared and the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed as a combination of the missing patterns, as shown in FIG. 12-53 (C).

When the pattern determination period has elapsed and the next variable display has begun, as shown in FIG. 12-53(D), the image display device 5 switches to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving), and a right-hit notification is executed. Note that at the timing of FIG. 12-53(C) when the blackout state is resolved, an image may be displayed or a sound effect may be output to notify that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) is about to begin.

This configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 12-53 can be realized, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) when a variable display that results in a time-saving rescue is displayed during the variable display start setting process.

(Example of performance in the second embodiment [Modification 2])
FIG. 12-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to the rescue time reduction in variant example 2 of embodiment 2.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 12-54, as shown in FIG. 12-54(A), the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is started, and when a predetermined period (e.g., 8 seconds) of the special pattern variable time (e.g., 12 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 12-54(B), the decorative pattern 100IW100 is displayed temporarily stopped in a combination of losing patterns on the image display device 5. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 12-54(B), the special pattern variable time has not elapsed, so the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed variable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-54(C), the image display device 5 executes a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) that was displayed immediately before. Also, while the time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) is being executed, the special pattern variation time elapses, and the small pattern 100IW101 is derived and displayed as a combination of losing patterns. The time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) continues to be executed during the pattern determination period.

When the pattern determination period has elapsed and the next variable display has begun, as shown in FIG. 12-54(D), the blackout state is cleared on the image display device 5, and the background image is switched to one corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (in this example, a background image with an orange display color). Also, as shown in FIG. 12-54(D), a right-hit notification is executed.

This configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 12-53 can be realized, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) when a variable display that results in a time-saving rescue is displayed during the variable display start setting process.

In addition, at the timing of Figures 12-53 (C), (D), Figures 12-54 (C), (D), etc., explanations regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, explanations of the rescue time reduction function and the effects of the rescue time reduction) may be provided using the caption display 100IW103 as shown in Figures 12-37 (A) and (B). Such a configuration can increase the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In the above-described embodiment 1 of the characteristic part 108IW, in the period before the rescue time reduction (for example, the period when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue fluctuation is 10 or less), the determination of the fluctuation pattern that will be a super reach and the determination of the execution of the preview performance are restricted, whereas in the embodiment 2, neither is restricted. However, by combining these, for example, in the period before the rescue time reduction (for example, the period when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) may be determined and a preview performance of a type with a low expectation among the preview performances may be executed. In other words, the determination of the fluctuation pattern that will be a super reach may be restricted, and the execution of a preview performance of a type with a high expectation among the preview performances may be restricted.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example shown above, as a performance (also called a rescue suggestion performance) that suggests the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction or that the rescue time reduction is near, a provocative performance, a countdown performance, an effect performance, or an initial result according to the number of times until the rescue time reduction or a caption display while waiting for customers (for example, the caption display 108IW101 shown in FIG. 12-26) is displayed, but is not limited to such a form. For example, at any timing during the fluctuation display or the fluctuation stop, the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction or the rescue time reduction may be suggested by the execution frequency or execution mode of an action performance that operates the movable body 32, a light emission performance that causes a light-emitting body such as a decorative LED to emit light in a specific mode (for example, to emit rainbow light), a vibration performance that vibrates the movable body 32, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 108IW and each of the modified examples described above, if the presentation control command sent when the power is turned on (for example, a presentation control command instructing recovery from a power outage or a presentation control command instructing initialization) cannot be received properly on the presentation control board 12 side (for example, if a command is missed or garbled), normal presentation can be executed based on commands specifying the game state or commands specifying the variation pattern, but rescue suggestion presentations that indicate the number of variations remaining until the rescue time reduction occurs or that the rescue time reduction is approaching may not be executed (note that they may be executed once a jackpot has occurred). This configuration makes it possible to prevent the player from getting their hopes up due to erroneous rescue suggestion presentations.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example shown above, if the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command (sent each time the variable display is executed in this example) that designates the number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is not received properly, the rescue suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, the rescue suggestion effect may not be executed only during the variable display when the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is not received properly, or the rescue suggestion effect may not be executed until the next big win occurs. Also, for example, if the command is not received properly, the rescue suggestion effect may be executed with a presentation mode or execution rate that suggests that there are many fluctuations remaining that will result in the rescue time reduction (i.e., the rescue time reduction is not close). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from getting hopeful due to an erroneous rescue suggestion effect.

In addition, the characteristic unit 108IW and each modified example shown above are applied to a gaming machine that controls to a big win game based on the variable display result, but this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the configuration of controlling to a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state shown in the characteristic unit 108IW and each modified example shown above may be applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be able to execute a role game that controls to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the role game during a small win game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples shown above, the number of times the time until the rescue time reduction occurs is fixed at 800, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear process is being executed or a jackpot has occurred, or the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched randomly to "800" or "900".

In the characteristic portion 108IW and each of the modified examples shown above, the time-saving flag C is set each time a rescue time-saving event occurs, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the time-saving flag (fourth numerical value) set for the second rescue time-saving event after a second transition may be different from the time-saving flag (third numerical value) set for the first rescue time-saving event.

In the characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples described above, different effects (fluctuation patterns) are used for the time-saving state after a jackpot and the rescue time-saving state, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the same effects (fluctuation patterns) may be used for the time-saving state after a jackpot and the rescue time-saving state. Specifically, the same notification (such as the notification in FIG. 12-39 (K) or a notification suggesting a future jackpot) may be given just before the end of the time-saving state after a jackpot and just before the start of the rescue time-saving state.

In the characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples described above, different effects (fluctuation patterns) are used for the time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed and the rescue time-saving function, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the same effects (fluctuation patterns) may be used for the time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed and the rescue time-saving function. Specifically, the same notification (such as the notification in FIG. 12-39 (K) or a notification suggesting a future jackpot) may be given when the time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed is about to end and when the rescue time-saving function is about to start.

As explained above, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1A) to (Means 8A).

(Means 1A) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19) that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; The state control means is capable of controlling the numerical information to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13, and a part that executes steps 100IWS75 and 100IWS76 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17). the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100); a predetermined suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined suggestion performance (for example, a notice performance) when the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-49, a portion executing step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120); and a control means for notifying the user that control of a special state is started based on the establishment of a special condition. The game device further includes a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a background image changes as shown in FIG. 12-52 (C1) and (C2), a blackout occurs when the fluctuation starts as shown in FIG. 12-53 (B), or a blackout occurs when the fluctuation ends as shown in FIG. 12-54 (C)) to notify the player (for example, a portion in which the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes step 100IWS638 as shown in FIG. 12-23), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect during the period before the special condition is established (for example, a portion in which the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes step 108IWS802A as shown in FIG. 12-44. See FIG. 12-50). With such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can surprise the player and increase interest.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means can execute a special notification effect when a variable display that meets a special condition is started, and the special notification effect is a form in which the effect display displayed on the display means before the special notification effect is started is made difficult to see (for example, blacking out when the variation starts, as shown in FIG. 12-53 (B)). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest.

(Means 3A) Means 1A includes a variable display execution means for effecting, capable of executing a variable display of the effect identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when the variable display that meets the special condition ends, and the special notification effect is in a form that makes the effect identification information difficult to see (e.g., blacking out when the variation ends, as shown in FIG. 12-54 (C)). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, and increase interest.

(Means 4A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a form in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (C1), a background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is executed). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest. It can also prevent the effects from becoming cumbersome.

(Means 5A) Any of means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanation performance execution means capable of performing an explanation performance regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, at the timing shown in Figs. 12-52 (C1), (C2), 12-53 (D), and 12-54 (D), an explanation is given using a telop display 100IW103 as shown in Figs. 12-37 (A) and (B)). Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) Any of means 1A to 5A includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 12-48) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and when a special condition is met, the variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is met (for example, variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)), and the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect after a non-specific display result (for example, a losing pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display when the special condition is met. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state has been controlled due to the fulfillment of the special condition, and to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is met.

(Means 7A) In any of means 1A to 6A, a variable display execution means (e.g., a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the start condition, a hold memory means (e.g., a first hold memory number buffer and a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a hold memory means (e.g., a first hold memory number buffer and a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored by the hold memory means even if the power supply is stopped. The game device includes a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) that can be initialized, an initialization means (e.g., a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) that can execute an initialization process to initialize the contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and a recovery means (e.g., a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6) that can execute a recovery process to restore the numerical information updated by the update means based on the contents of the backup storage means and the reserved information stored in the reserved storage means when the power supply is started. With such a configuration, while optimizing the control by the initialization process, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player when a power interruption occurs in a situation where reserved information corresponding to the special number of variable displays is stored before the power supply is stopped.

(Means 8A) In any of means 1A to 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (e.g., the state of time-saving flags A to C) that can identify that the device is being controlled in a special state, an execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (e.g., the value of a time-saving count counter) that can identify the number of times a variable display has been executed in a special state, a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) that can retain the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information even when power supply is stopped, and an initialization means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) that can execute an initialization process to initialize the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and when the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information are held by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, the initialization means initializes the special state information and the execution count information in the initialization process but does not initialize the numerical information (e.g., initializes the state of time-saving flags A to C and the value of the time-saving count counter, but does not initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter (i.e., sets the value before power outage)). Such a configuration can prevent the numerical information from being intentionally initialized, increasing the degree of relief available to the player.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1B) to (Means 5B) below.

(Means 1B) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that includes state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in FIG. 12-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 12-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (e.g., as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100). and a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 12-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 12-14). The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 12-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, 12-17, a part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where it is not a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-7(A) and (B), the variable display pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variable display pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are different from the case of a jackpot). In the case of either a win or a miss), when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the rate of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-7(A), the rate of determining the variable display pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the variable display pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) is higher in the case of a jackpot than the variable display pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) in the case of a jackpot), and in the case of a specified period before the special condition is established, the rate of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than that of the period before the specified period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-8(F) and (G), the rate of determining the variable display pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the variable display pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) is lower immediately before the rescue time reduction). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed even though a variable display by a specific variable display pattern is executed in the specified period before the special condition is established.

(Means 2B) Means 1B is provided with a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing suggestive effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, or a caption display while waiting for customers), and the suggestive effect execution means is more likely to execute suggestive effects in a predetermined period before the special condition is established than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS807 to S809, and also the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes 105IWS251). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player look forward to the establishment of a special condition, and to increase interest. It is also possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage caused by ending the game just before the special condition is established.

(Means 3B) Means 1B or 2B is provided with an explanation performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) capable of executing an explanation performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-37 (A) and (B)), regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, which is a caption display 100IW103. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) In any of means 1B to 3B, a notice performance execution means is provided that can execute a notice performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the notice performance execution means can execute a notice performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the notice performance is executed more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result than when the specific display result is not the case, and the notice performance is executed less frequently when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result during a predetermined period before the special condition is established (e.g., a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than during the period before the predetermined period (e.g., the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A as shown in FIG. 12-31. See FIG. 12-32 (A) and (B)). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a notice performance is executed during a predetermined period before the special condition is established but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

(Means 5B) In any of means 1B to 4B, a preview performance execution means is provided that is capable of executing a preview performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance using a specific mode (e.g., performance mode "red") and a predetermined mode (e.g., performance mode "blue") in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the display result is not a specific display result, and the rate at which the preview performance is executed using the specific mode is higher than the predetermined mode when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and the rate at which the preview performance is executed using the specific mode is lower during a predetermined period before a special condition is established (e.g., a period when the remaining number of times until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than during the period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A as shown in Figure 12-31. See Figures 12-32 (C) and (D)). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is performed in a specific mode during a specified period before the special condition is met, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1C) to (Means 8C).

(Means 1C) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and a state control means that is controllable to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in FIG. 12-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 12-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100). The present invention is provided with an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13), and a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 12-14) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern PA3-1 (entry miss)). The state control means determines whether the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed. Therefore, when a special condition is satisfied, the game can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 12-17, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS71 and 100IWS72). The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met, but is not capable of determining a special variable display pattern before the special condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, a portion that executes steps 108IWS1701A and S1701B in the game control microcomputer 100), and further includes a specific notification effect execution means that is capable of executing a specific notification effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to a special state when a variable display using a special variable display pattern is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, a portion that executes step 108IWS806B in the game control microcomputer 100; see FIG. 12-38 (G) and (H)). With such a configuration, the player can be clearly notified that the game will be controlled to a special state due to the establishment of a special condition, and the player's interest when the special condition is established can be increased.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the specific notification effect execution means is capable of executing a specific notification effect when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and is equipped with a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect that notifies that a specific display result is derived and displayed after executing an effect in a common manner with the specific notification effect when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, a part that executes step 108IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100. See FIGS. 12-41 (G') and (H')). With such a configuration, the player is notified that the control will be controlled to an advantageous state after once recognizing that a special condition is satisfied, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases interest.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, a predetermined notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a predetermined notification effect (e.g., a full rotation effect) that notifies the player that a specific display result is derived and displayed in a manner that is not executed before the special condition is met. Such a configuration can provide the player with a sense of surprise and specialness, and can increase interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a notification effect to notify that the specific display result will be derived and displayed in the same manner as before the special condition is met (for example, even when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, this is realized by determining variable pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) or variable pattern PB2-3 (super reach β) in the same way as when the value is not 0). With such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be made common when the special condition is met and before it is met, and data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the display period (e.g., 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is met is longer than the display period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the display result of the variable display before the special condition is met (e.g., the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS1135 as shown in FIG. 12-15; see FIG. 12-36), and a notification effect execution means (e.g., the part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS847 as shown in FIG. 12-33) capable of executing a notification effect that notifies that control of the special state is about to begin is provided. With such a configuration, a period for executing a notification effect in the normal state can be secured, and the effect can be clarified when switching the game state, while increasing interest.

(Means 6C) Any of means 1C to 5C includes a signal output means for outputting a specific signal (e.g., a variable stop signal) corresponding to the start of a display period of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is met, at the start of the display period, and outputting a special signal (e.g., a jackpot 4 signal) corresponding to the control of the special state after outputting the specific signal (see, for example, FIG. 12-18). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the specific signal and the special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means outputs a special signal at the start of a special process (e.g., the next change postponement process shown in FIG. 12-45) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of signal omissions occurring externally when a specific signal and a special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to means 6C, a first passing area (e.g., a first start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a specific path (e.g., a path by hitting from the left) can pass through, a second passing area (e.g., a second start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a special path (e.g., a path by hitting from the right) can pass through, and a variable display execution means (e.g., a part where the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing, as variable display of identification information, a variable display of a first identification information based on the first start condition being satisfied and a variable display of a second identification information based on the second start condition being satisfied) and a special output means capable of executing a special output capable of specifying that the gaming medium should be launched toward a special path (for example, outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the player is in a gaming state in which a right hit is expected, or an indication that a right hit is in progress), where the first start condition is established based on the gaming medium passing through the first passing area, the second start condition is established based on the gaming medium passing through the second passing area, and the special output means is capable of executing a special output at the start of a special process (for example, the next variable postponement process shown in FIG. 12-45) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is established has elapsed. With such a configuration, a special output capable of specifying that the gaming medium should be launched toward a special path can be executed at an appropriate timing.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1D) to (Means 5D).

(Means 1D) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19) 12-13, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS71), and a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 12-48). The state control means determines whether or not a variable display pattern has been determined based on the execution of the variable display by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times that the variable display has been executed. When a special condition is satisfied, the game can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 12-17, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173, and The variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied, and further includes a special notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638) that can execute a special notification effect (for example, display of a background image (orange) corresponding to a rescue time reduction) that notifies the player that control of the special state will begin after a non-specific display result (for example, a losing pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the game state, and it is possible to increase the interest when the special condition is satisfied. In addition, it is possible to commonize the variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity.

(Means 2D) Means 1D includes a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage number buffer and a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead prediction execution means capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) in which the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means is the preview target, and the look-ahead prediction execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the preview target among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied, while restricting the execution of a look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is the preview target (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702 as shown in Figure 12-27). Such a configuration can prevent the control process from becoming too complicated and also prevent inconsistencies from occurring in the presentation content.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a form in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to the special state (see, for example, FIG. 12-52 (C1)). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest, and also to prevent the effects from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) Any of means 1D to 3D is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, or a caption display while waiting for customers), and the suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect for a predetermined period before the special condition is established. With such a configuration, the special notification effect is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

(Means 5D) In any of means 1D to 4D, an explanation performance execution means is provided that can execute an explanation performance regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, an explanation is given using a telop display 100IW103 as shown in Fig. 12-37(A) and (B) at the timing shown in Fig. 12-52(C1), (C2), Fig. 12-53(D), and Fig. 12-54(D). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1E) to (Means 4E).

(Means 1E-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in FIG. 12-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 12-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and a variable display is executed. and a variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 12-14) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the state control means determines whether or not a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. The game control means can control the game to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the game control means can control the game to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part in which steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part in which steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS17 in the game control microcomputer 100). 3), the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display pattern determination means determines the shortened variable display pattern more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when a special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, the part executing step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. See FIG. 12-7(C) and FIG. 12-8(E)). With such a configuration, when the execution count of the variable display reaches a specific count, the variable display is executed with the shortened variable display pattern more frequently, and the period until the control to the next advantageous state is shortened, so that the decline in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 1E-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19) that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and a variable display is executed. and a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 12-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β)) that corresponds to the execution of a reach performance. The state control means determines a variable display pattern based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. The game control means can control the game to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the game control means can control the game to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part in which steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part in which steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display pattern determination means determines the specific variable display pattern at a lower rate when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, the part executing step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. See FIG. 12-7(C) and FIG. 12-8(E)). With such a configuration, when the execution count of the variable display reaches a specific count, the rate at which the display result of the variable display by the specific variable display pattern becomes a non-specific display result is reduced, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) Means 1E is provided with background display means (for example, a portion that executes steps 100IWS634, S638 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 12-23) that can display different background displays on the display means for the special state that is controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when a special condition is met. With such a configuration, the difference in game state can be clearly notified to the player, increasing interest.

(Means 3E) In means 1E or means 2E, a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage number buffer or a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead prediction execution means capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) with the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means as the prediction target, and the look-ahead prediction execution means has a different ratio of executing the look-ahead prediction performance and a different ratio of which of the multiple types of look-ahead prediction performances it executes between a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS703 as shown in Figure 12-27. See Figures 12-28 (A) and (B)). With this configuration, the frequency and type of pre-reading preview effects can be made different between the special state that is controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when a special condition is met, which can increase interest.

(Means 4E) In any of means 1E to means 3E, a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold memory number buffer or a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead prediction execution means capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) in which the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means is the preview target, and the look-ahead prediction execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the preview target among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied, while restricting the execution of the look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is the preview target (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702 as shown in Figure 12-27). This configuration makes it possible to avoid complicating the control process and to avoid inconsistencies in the presentation content.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1a) to (Means 10a).

(Means 1a) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that includes state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in FIG. 12-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 12-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (e.g., as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part that executes step The state control means can control the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, thereby establishing a special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 12-17, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71). With such a configuration, rescue of the player can be preferably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing their motivation to play.

In this example, the initial value of the rescue time reduction counter is set when a jackpot occurs, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, multiple types of jackpots (jackpots that do not provide time reduction, jackpots that award a small number of game balls, jackpots with the second special symbol, etc.) may be provided, and the initial value of the rescue time reduction counter may not be set for some jackpots.

In this example, the first special symbol is mainly changed in the normal state, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the number of reserved memories may be increased so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In means 1a, the special condition may be configured to be established based on a predetermined display result (e.g., a losing pattern) different from the specific display result being derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as the display result of the variable display (for example, the part that executes steps 100IWS63, 100IWS71, 100IWS74, and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13, and the part that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17). With such a configuration, the player is relieved when a display result unfavorable to the player is derived and displayed in succession, so that a decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3a) In means 1a or 2a, the update means may be configured to update the numerical information when a variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) (e.g., a portion that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17). Such a configuration can effectively realize rescue of the player. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and since the special state can be controlled again even after it has been controlled to once, it is possible to control the special state until it is effectively controlled to an advantageous state, which can reduce the player's investment and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this example, the rescue time-saving count counter is updated in the low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (high probability state), and low probability high base (time-saving state), but this is not limited to the above. For example, the rescue time-saving count counter may be configured to be updated in all four states: low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (high probability state), low probability high base (time-saving state), and high probability low base (latent high probability state). In this case, it is also applicable to a gaming machine that executes a lottery for falling to the normal state in the high probability state.

In this example, the second special symbol is consumed first, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B may be provided in the first start winning port, a high probability low base (small win rush) may be provided where small wins occur frequently, the balls may be consumed in the order they are won, and the first and second special symbols may change simultaneously.

In this example, a first special symbol and a second special symbol are provided, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the reel may be configured to only provide the first special symbol.

(Means 4a) In any of means 1a to 3a, the update means may be configured to set the numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS144, and as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the tendency to gamble more than necessary.

(Means 5a) In means 4a, the predetermined condition may be configured to be control to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the advantageous state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the tendency for gambling to become more than necessary.

(Means 6a) In means 4a, the state control means may be configured to be able to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (e.g., the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17), and the predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., the part that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the tendency to gamble more than necessary.

(Means 7a) In Means 4a, the predetermined condition may be configured so that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS144 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is essentially possible to control the game to a special state until the next advantageous state, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 8a) Means 4a may be configured to include a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding the numerical information updated by the update means even when the power supply is stopped, and the update means may be configured to set the numerical information held by the backup storage means to an initial value when a specific condition is met (e.g., execution of an initialization process) (e.g., as shown in FIG. 12-11, a portion that executes step 100IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the predetermined condition is that the specific condition is met (e.g., as shown in FIG. 12-11, a portion that executes steps 100IWS8 and 100IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the game center to operate, since if the numerical information up to the special number of times is held when initialization is performed in the game center, it may be too disadvantageous for the game center.

(Means 9a) In any of means 1a to 8a, a presentation control means corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) is provided, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 12-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100). 172), and can be controlled to a special state for a specific period again based on the execution of a special number of variable displays in the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS172), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the part shown in variant 4 in FIG. 12-47). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed by taking measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display to change the presentation mode.

(Means 10a) In any of means 1a to 8a, a presentation control means corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) is provided, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 12-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100). The part that executes the above), and based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times in the special state, it is possible to control again to the special state for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the parts shown in Modifications 2 and 3 in FIG. 12-47). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by deliberately executing the same presentation, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily aware that the situation is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1b-1), (Means 1b-2) to (Means 5b).

(Means 1b-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a gaming area in which gaming media can be shot into a first path (e.g., a path by hitting left) and a second path (e.g., a path by hitting right), and a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19). update means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of a variable display (for example, a portion executing step S100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13); and process execution means for updating a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including control of the variable display and control of the advantageous state, and executing a process corresponding to the data value (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5). The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, a portion executing step S100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13). 12-17, a portion which executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a portion which executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13), the processing execution means executes a first process relating to the variable display when the data value is a first numerical value (for example, a portion which executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5), and when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, When the data value is a third value different from the first and second values, the state control means executes a third process for controlling the state to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100). In the normal state, the game medium is fired to the first path to play, and in the special state, the game medium is fired to the second path to play, and a launch promotion notification means (see FIG. 12-46) is provided that issues a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be fired to the second path during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be achieved. For example, by issuing a launch promotion notification to the second path before the special state is controlled, a performance related to the launch promotion notification can be executed early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1b-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that has a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19) that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and a part that executes numerical information based on the execution of the variable display. and a process execution means (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including control of variable display and control of advantageous state, and executes a process corresponding to the data value. The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13). the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 as shown in FIG. 12-17), the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS67 as shown in FIG. 12-13), the processing executing means executes a first processing relating to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS75 as shown in FIG. 5). The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing steps S110 to S113, which executes a second process related to an advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), a third process for the state control means to control to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first and second numerical values (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-43, a part that executes steps 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a presentation execution means (see FIG. 12-46) that executes a notification presentation that notifies the player that the game is being controlled to a special state during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by issuing a launch promotion notification to the second path before the game is controlled to the special state, a presentation related to the launch promotion notification can be executed early when the game is controlled to the special state.

In this example, priority is given to processing related to the jackpot, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, the system may be configured to prioritize processing related to the variable display or processing related to the rescue time reduction.

In this example, a right-hit notification is given in the third process, the next change postponement process, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the device may be configured to execute only a mode transition effect that suggests a transition to a time-saving state without a right-hit notification.

(Means 2b) In means 1b-1 and 1b-2, the process execution means may be configured to execute a second process after the first process when a specific display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 is executed and step 100IWS114 is not executed). With such a configuration, priority is given to control of an advantageous state, so that a disadvantageous result is not reached for the player and a decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3b) In means 1b-1, means 1b-2 or means 2b, the update means may be configured to update the numerical information when variable display is started (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13), the processing execution means may be configured to change the special information from first information to second information when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17), change the special information from second information to first information when the state control means controls to a special state (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS145 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-16), and execute different processing when the special information is the first information and when it is the second information (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-14). With this configuration, the process of transitioning to a special state can be executed optimally by managing the special information.

(Means 4b) Means 3b may include a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that determines the variable display pattern of the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a different variable display pattern when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-14). With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

(Means 5b) Means 3b may include a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that determines a variable display pattern for the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a variable display pattern in which the confirmation time of the display result differs when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, a portion that executes steps 100IWS1128 and 100IWS1130 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-15). With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown in (means 1c) to (means 6c) below.

(Means 1c) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a game control means capable of controlling the game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a presentation control means that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7). The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-31 and a portion that executes step S108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120) that can control the game to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S100IWS166 and S100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17 and a portion that executes step S100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19). The game control means includes a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100), an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of a variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a state information control means for controlling state information capable of specifying a state controlled by the state control means, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-12, a part for executing step 100IWS64 in the game control microcomputer 100), and is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part for executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100). 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the status information control means sets the status information to a first numerical value in the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, i.e., neither the time-saving flag A nor C is set, and the corresponding data is "0"), and sets the status information to a second numerical value when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state is controlled based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, i.e., neither the time-saving flag A nor C is set, and the corresponding data is "0"). when the special state is entered based on the establishment of a special condition, the status information is set to a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS173, i.e., a time-saving flag C is set and the data corresponding to the time-saving flag C is "1"); the game control means is capable of transmitting specific information to the presentation control means, and when the special state is entered, the game control means is capable of transmitting specific information according to whether the status information is the second numerical value or the third numerical value (for example, the portion shown in FIG. 12-10, the portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS540 as shown in FIG. 12-19, and the portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS174 as shown in FIG. 12-17). Such a configuration allows for optimal control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become more complex. For example, different game states can be easily identified, making control easier, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the presentation can be performed optimally when the presentation control means executes a different presentation.

In this example, a time-saving state A designation command or a time-saving state C designation command is sent as the specific information, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the background designation command or the variation pattern command may be configured to be sent in a manner that allows identification that the time-saving state is a jackpot, a time-saving state is a miss, or a time-saving state is a rescue time-saving state. Also, for example, when a jackpot is hit, a jackpot start designation command (fanfare designation command) or a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) may be sent in different manners depending on the game state, and the fanfare period or ending period may change depending on which command is received.

(Means 2c) In means 1c, the state information control means may be configured to set the state information to a fourth numerical value different from the first, second and third numerical values when a special condition is satisfied again after the state has been controlled to a special state based on the satisfaction of a special condition (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). Such a configuration can enable suitable control even if new functions are added and the specifications become more complex. For example, control becomes easier because different game states can be suitably identified, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, a suitable presentation can be executed when the presentation control means executes a different presentation.

(Means 3c) In means 1c or 2c, the presentation control means may be configured to be able to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 is the part that executes steps 100IWS634, S638). With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Means 4c) In any of means 1c to 3c, the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS634 and 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since a new presentation is not required and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

(Means 5c) In any of means 1c to 4c, the state control means may be configured to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed (e.g., a portion that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (e.g., the presentation control CPU 120 is a portion that executes steps 100IWS636, S638). With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, and improving the interest of the game.

(Means 6c) In any of means 1c to 4c, the state control means may be configured to control to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of the special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS636 and 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since a new presentation is not required, and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (means 1d) to (means 4d).

(Means 1d) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a game control means capable of controlling the game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a presentation control means that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7, and a part that executes step 108IWS811 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 12-31), and The means include a state control means capable of controlling to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13), and a control means that updates numerical information based on the number of times the variable display is executed when power supply is stopped (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS72 in the game control microcomputer 100). and a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the special number of times, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is met by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (e.g., a portion that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13, and a portion that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17), and the update means changes the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and the gaming control means can transmit predetermined information to the presentation control means when power supply is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means can execute a suggestion presentation regarding the number of times the variable display is executed during a predetermined period after power supply is started based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the part that executes step 100IWS630 in the presentation control CPU 120). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, it is possible to motivate players to play from the opening of the gaming facility, thereby increasing the operating rate of the gaming machines.

In this example, the initial result is shown as a suggestion regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to execute suggestion effects such as a change in the background, effects during the change up to 100 spins, or displays on the demo screen or menu screen.

When a command specifying initialization (S9 in FIG. 12-12) is sent, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until the rescue time reduction is reached as an initial value and execute the performance.

(Means 2d) In means 1d, the game control means may be configured to be able to transmit specific information capable of identifying the numerical information held in the backup storage means to the performance control means when power supply is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100). Such a configuration can enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become more complex. For example, this can motivate players to play from the opening of the gaming facility, thereby increasing the operating rate of the gaming machines and suppressing an increase in the processing burden.

In this example, a command capable of identifying the value of the rescue time reduction counter is sent upon recovery, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a command capable of identifying a predetermined range, such as 1 to 99 rotations in 100 rotation increments, 100 to 199 rotations, ... 500 to 599 rotations, may be sent, or a command may be sent that cannot identify rescue time reduction counter values of 128 or more, but can identify counter values of 127 or less.

(Means 3d) In means 1d or 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the presentation control means in relation to the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, the part that executes step 100IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means can execute a special presentation related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the presentation control CPU 120), and the specific information may be configured to include first specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is less than a predetermined value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-9, the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command) and second specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-9, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command). Such a configuration can enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complex. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to players, the risk of unknowingly inflicting losses can be reduced and processing of specific information can be efficiently achieved.

Note that, in this example, a case is shown in which the second specific information, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, is sent when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value, but this is not the only possible aspect. For example, it may be configured not to send the second specific information, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value.

(Means 4d) In any of means 1d to 3d, the presentation control means may be configured to be capable of executing a suggestive presentation that suggests that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-33, the part that executes step 100IWS847 in the presentation control CPU 120, FIG. 12-39(I) to FIG. 12-40(M)), and to execute a suggestive presentation each time a second predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the special number of variable displays is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the presentation control CPU 120, FIG. 12-37(A) to FIG. 12-38(F)). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, the risk of unknowingly causing losses can be reduced.

In this example, the presentation is executed based on the count value of the rescue time reduction counter, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of changes and execute the presentation after resetting the rescue time reduction counter.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1e-1) and (Means 1e-2).

(Means 1e-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means capable of controlling a game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a performance control means that controls a performance corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7, and a part that executes step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 12-31), and the gaming control means is a special state ( a state control means for controlling the variable display to a state in which the variable display is executed, for example, a time-shortened state (for example, a portion for executing steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17, and a portion for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19); an update means for updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display (for example, a portion for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13); a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) for holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped; and an initialization means (e.g., a portion executing step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-14) capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means including information regarding the number of times the game has been derived and displayed successively. The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (e.g., a portion executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13, and a portion executing steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17). The update means is configured to update the first identification information The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means executes different presentations when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized and when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized (for example, the parts shown in Modifications 2 and 3 of FIG. 12-47). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as guessing the setting value increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

(Means 1e-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means capable of controlling a game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a performance control means that controls a performance corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7, and a part that executes step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 12-31), and the gaming control means is a special state ( a state control means capable of controlling the variable display to a state in which the variable display is executed, for example, a time-shortened state (for example, a portion executing steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17, and a portion executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19); an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display (for example, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13); a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display is executed when power supply is stopped; and a predetermined display result when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, and a special condition is established by the numerical information updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13, and a part that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17). The update means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, and a special condition is established by the numerical information updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13, and a part that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17). The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means executes different presentations after being controlled to the special state when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized and when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized (for example, the parts shown in Modifications 2 and 3 of FIG. 12-47). With such a configuration, even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be made possible. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as guessing the setting value increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

In this example, only fluctuation pattern table B is used after the RAM is cleared, but this is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to use multiple fluctuation pattern tables, just like after a jackpot.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (means 1f) to (means 15h) below may be applied.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information and a variable display of a second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed, and is equipped with a state control means that can control to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, the state control means is controllable to the special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and a special condition is established when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed. The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, there are a plurality of types of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state and a special advantageous state, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the plurality of advantageous states is controlled to, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when a special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the special advantageous state is a special jackpot, the specific advantageous state is a regular jackpot, the time-shortened state after the special jackpot time-shortened state is more advantageous than the time-shortened state after a regular jackpot, and the time-shortened state for the rescue time-shortened state is more advantageous than the time-shortened state after a regular jackpot.

(Means 2f) In means 1f, the rate at which the game is controlled to a special state with a special advantage degree after being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the variable display of the first identification information is triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state by the variable display of the second identification information, and the number of times the variable display is executed to establish a special condition is the same as the special number of times when the game is controlled to an advantageous state by the variable display of the first identification information and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state by the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten interest by providing different gameplay characteristics between the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, while preventing excessive gambling from occurring due to the special number of times being the same between the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the rate at which the special advantage level in the time-saving state after a jackpot (time-saving continues until the next jackpot) becomes different between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the number of fluctuations of 800 times, which is the condition for controlling to the rescue time-saving state, is the same when controlling to a jackpot based on the first special pattern and when controlling to a jackpot based on the second special pattern.

(Means 3f) Means 1f or 2f is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value having a first probability of being controlled to an advantageous state and an advantageous setting value having a second probability of being controlled to an advantageous state that is higher than the first probability, and the special condition is more likely to be established when the setting is the unfavorable setting value than when the setting is the advantageous setting value, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values with different advantageous degrees for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that it is possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure the number of fluctuations that are the conditions for control to the rescue time reduction to be smaller when set to an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") than when set to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"), so that the advantageous degree in the rescue time reduction is higher than the advantageous degree in the time reduction state after the jackpot. In addition, an unfavorable setting (e.g., "1") has a higher rate of achieving rescue time reduction than an advantageous setting (e.g., "6"), and the rescue time reduction is always 800 times the number of time reductions (effectively until the next jackpot), so it may be more advantageous than a time reduction state via a jackpot (e.g., after a normal jackpot, the number of time reductions is 100).

(Means 4f) Any of means 1f to 3f is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which the player is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which the player is controlled when a special condition is met is common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value that is set, and sound gameplay can be achieved.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is possible to set one of multiple setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure it so that which of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled to after a jackpot is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantage in the rescue time-saving state is also the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 5f) In any of means 1f to 4f, the proportion of the advantageous states among the multiple types to which the game is controlled differs between when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is the same when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is the same regardless of which setting value is set, so that an appropriate degree of relief can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the ratios controlled for normal jackpots and special jackpots are made different when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, and the advantage of the rescue time reduction is the same when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the second special symbol.

(Means 6f) In any of means 1f to 5f, a variable display pattern determination means is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means has a higher probability of determining the shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 6f is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of Figure 12-8 (E).

(Means 7f) Any of means 1f to 6f includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern determination means has a lower probability of determining a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 7f is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of Figure 12-8 (E).

(Means 8f) In any of means 1f to 7f, the update means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on execution of a variable display in a special state, the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and the special state is ended based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times in the special state, backup storage means can hold the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the update means and the setting information of the special information even if the power supply is stopped, and initialization means can initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and the initialization means initializes the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information when the predetermined condition is met, and does not initialize the numerical information. With such a configuration, the degree of salvation of the player can be increased even when the predetermined condition is met.

In addition, in this characteristic section 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 8f may be configured, for example, to initialize the time-saving flags A to C and the value of the time-saving count counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 12-11, but not to initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information and a variable display of a second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed, comprising: a state control means that can control to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display; a variable display execution means that can execute a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition and the satisfaction of a start condition; a hold memory means that can store information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied; a backup memory means that can hold the numerical information and the hold information when power supply is stopped; and a backup memory means that can store the hold information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The game includes an initialization means capable of initializing the contents stored in the backup storage means, and a restoration means capable of executing restoration control for restoring the numerical information updated by the update means and the reserved information stored in the reserved storage means based on the contents stored in the backup storage means when power supply is started, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored reserved information after the restoration control is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player while optimizing the control by initialization.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, when the initialization process is executed, the rescue time reduction counter and the reserved memory are reset, while when the power outage is restored, the rescue time reduction counter and the reserved memory are restored, and when the fluctuation display corresponding to the reserved memory at the time of restoration reaches the 800th fluctuation and the condition for control to the rescue time reduction is met, the rescue time reduction can be controlled.

(Means 2g) In means 1g, the rate at which the game is controlled to a special state with a special advantage degree after being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the variable display of the first identification information is triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, and the number of times the variable display is executed to establish a special condition is the same as the special number of times when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten interest by providing different gameplay characteristics between the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, while preventing excessive gambling from occurring due to the special number of times being the same between the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the rate at which the special advantage level in the time-saving state after a jackpot (time-saving continues until the next jackpot) becomes different between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the number of fluctuations that is the condition for control to the rescue time-saving state is the same when the jackpot is controlled based on the first special pattern and when the jackpot is controlled based on the second special pattern.

(Means 3g) Means 1g or 2g is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value having a first probability of being controlled to an advantageous state and an advantageous setting value having a second probability higher than the first probability of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the special condition is more likely to be established when the setting is unfavorable than when the setting is advantageous, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

To apply the gaming machine of means 3g to this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, for example, it is possible to set one of a number of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure the number of changes until the rescue time reduction is started to be smaller for an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") than for an advantageous setting (for example, "6"), and to make the advantage of the rescue time reduction higher than the advantage of the time reduction state after the jackpot. In addition, an unfavorable setting (e.g., "1") is more likely to result in a miss than an advantageous setting (e.g., "6"), and therefore is more likely to result in a rescue time reduction, and the rescue time reduction is always 800 times (effectively until the next jackpot), so it may be more advantageous than a time reduction state via a jackpot (e.g., after a normal jackpot, the time reduction is 100 times).

(Means 4b) Any of means 1g to 3g is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which the player is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which the player is controlled when a special condition is met is common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value that is set, and sound gameplay can be achieved.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is possible to set one of multiple setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure it so that which of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled to after a jackpot is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantage in the rescue time-saving state is also the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 5g) In any of means 1g to 4g, the proportion of the advantageous states among the multiple types to which the game is controlled differs between when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is the same when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is the same regardless of which setting value is set, so that an appropriate degree of relief can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the ratios controlled for normal jackpots and special jackpots are made different when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, and the advantage of the rescue time reduction is the same when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the second special symbol.

(Means 6g) Any of means 1g to 5g includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means has a higher probability of determining the shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 6g is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of FIG. 12-8 (E).

(Means 7g) Any of means 1g to 6g includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern determination means has a lower probability of determining a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is met than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. Such a configuration can prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 7g is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of FIG. 12-8 (E).

(Means 8g) In any of means 1g to 7g, the update means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on execution of a variable display in a special state, the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and the special state is ended based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times in the special state, backup storage means can hold the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the update means and the setting information of the special information even if the power supply is stopped, and initialization means can initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and the initialization means initializes the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information when the predetermined condition is met, and does not initialize the numerical information. With such a configuration, the degree of salvation of the player can be increased even when the predetermined condition is met.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 8g may be configured, for example, to initialize the time-saving flags A to C and the value of the time-saving count counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 12-11, but not to initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine that executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived display of a specific display result, includes a state control means that can control to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and the state control means can control to the special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means further includes a suggestive performance execution means that updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and can execute a suggestive performance related to the establishment of the special condition, and the suggestive performance execution means has a ratio of which of a plurality of performance modes is used to execute the suggestive performance depending on the number of times the variable display is executed, and the performance mode of the suggestive performance is a mode that suggests the period until the special condition is established. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to the performance mode of the suggestive performance, and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1h to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is sufficient to configure it so that the ratio of whether or not to execute a countdown effect that indicates the number of fluctuations that is the condition for controlling the rescue time reduction is changed according to the count value of the rescue time reduction counter. Also, the gaming machine of means 1h can be realized by a configuration that determines whether or not to execute a caption display while waiting for customers and the presentation mode, using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 12-25.

(Means 2h) In means 1h, the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is a mode in which the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is met can be specified. With such a configuration, the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is met can be clearly notified to the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown presentation that indicates the number of fluctuations that will be the condition for control of the rescue time reduction.

(Means 3h) In means 1h or 2h, the suggestive effect is an effect of displaying a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a number of different forms that differ in at least one of color and size, and the period until the suggested special condition is met differs depending on the form in which the specific image is displayed. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the form of the specific image.

In this characteristic section 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 3h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 12-25 is used to determine whether or not to display subtitles while waiting for customers and the presentation style. In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3h, for example, the color and size of the countdown numbers in the countdown presentation image may be configured to differ depending on the count value of the rescue time-saving counter.

(Means 4h) Any of means 1h to 3h includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition and the satisfaction of a start condition, a reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved storage means, and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance when the predetermined image is displayed, and the rate at which suggestive performance is executed when the predetermined image is displayed varies depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance is executed, and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 4h is configured to determine whether or not to display subtitles while waiting for customers, for example, using the table shown in FIG. 12-25.

(Means 5h) Any of means 1h to 4h includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved storage means, and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance when the predetermined image is displayed, and the rate at which suggestive performance is executed in a predetermined manner when the predetermined image is displayed varies depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to the presence or absence of a suggested performance manner and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 5h is based on a configuration in which the presentation mode of the caption display while waiting for customers is determined using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 12-25.

(Means 6h) Any of means 1h to 5h includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition and the satisfaction of a start condition, a reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved storage means, and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance based on at least one of detecting that the operating means has been operated and that the gaming medium has passed through a predetermined area when the predetermined image is displayed. With such a configuration, a suggestive performance can be performed for a player who actually plays a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 6h to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, when the demo state is entered, if a gaming ball is detected by operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 or at the start hole, a caption indicating the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is executed is displayed.

(Means 7h) Any of means 1h to 6h includes a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive performance execution means has a different rate of executing suggestive performance depending on which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the presence or absence of execution of the suggestive performance, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting the setting value.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the means 7h is configured to use the table shown in FIG. 12-25 to determine whether or not to display subtitles while passengers are waiting.

(Means 8h) Any of means 1h to 7h includes a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive performance execution means has a different rate of executing a suggestive performance in a specific manner depending on which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the manner of the suggestive performance, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting a setting value.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the means 8h is configured to use the table shown in FIG. 12-25 to determine whether or not to display subtitles while waiting for customers and the presentation mode.

(Means 9h) Any of means 1h to 6h includes a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set setting value, the setting suggestion effect execution means has a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means has a common rate of executing a suggestion effect regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestion effect is executed, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 9h to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is possible to set one of multiple setting values with different advantageous degrees for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests the setting value (for example, a performance with a different execution rate depending on the setting value), it is possible to configure it so that the execution rate of the caption display during waiting for customers is the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 10h) In any of means 1h to 6h and means 9h, a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set setting value, the setting suggestion effect execution means has a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect in a specific manner depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means has a common rate of executing a suggestion effect in a specific manner regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the aspect of the suggestion effect, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

To apply the gaming machine of means 10h to this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, for example, it is possible to set one of a number of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests the setting value (for example, a performance with a different execution rate depending on the setting value), it is possible to configure it so that the execution rate of the caption display during customer waiting in the red performance mode is the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 11h) In any of means 1h to 10h, the suggestive performance execution means executes suggestive performances at a different rate in a specific period after the start of power supply depending on whether an initialization process is executed when power supply is started or whether a recovery process is executed. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 11c to this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, for example, it is sufficient to configure the machine so that the rate at which the captions and countdown effects are displayed while customers are waiting differs between after the initialization process and after the power outage is restored.

(Means 12h) Any of means 1h to 11h includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met, and further includes a specific notification effect execution means for executing a specific notification effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met and a variable display based on the special variable display pattern is being executed without determining a special variable display pattern before the special condition is met. With such a configuration, the player can be notified that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met, and the player can be clearly notified of a change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is met.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 12h is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the pattern table for the rescue time-saving variation miss shown in Figure 12-8 (I).

(Means 13h) Any of means 1h to 12h includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where it is not the specific display result, and when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the rate of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern, and when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, the rate of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower in a predetermined period before a special condition is satisfied than in a period before the predetermined period. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 13h is based on a configuration that uses the variation pattern table shown in Figures 12-8 (F) and (G), for example.

(Means 14h) Any of means 1h to 13h includes a preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance is executed more frequently when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result than when it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance is executed less frequently in a specified period before a special condition is established than in a period prior to the specified period when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 14h is configured to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 12-32.

(Means 15h) Any of means 1h to 14h includes a preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in a specific manner and a predetermined manner in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, the preview performance is executed more frequently in the specific manner than in the predetermined manner when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, and the preview performance is executed less frequently in the specific manner during a predetermined period before a special condition is established than during a period prior to the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 15h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 12-32 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the performance mode.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 4A First special symbol display device, 4B Second special symbol display device, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative symbol display area, 6A Winning ball device, 6B Variable winning ball device, 7 Special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R Speaker, 9 Game effect lamp, 10 General winning port, 11 Main board, 12 Performance control board, 13 Sound control board, 14 Lamp control board, 15 Relay board, 21 Gate switch, 22A First start port switch, 22B Second start port switch, 23 Count switch, 25A First reserve indicator, 25B Second reserve indicator, 25C General reserve indicator, 30 Ball hitting operation handle, 31A Stick controller, 31B Push button, 32 Movable body, 35A Controller sensor unit, 35B Push sensor, 41 Pass gate, 81, 82 Solenoid, 100 Game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 Random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 Switch circuit, 111 Output circuit, 123 Display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a launching means capable of launching game media in response to an operation by a player;
a display means for displaying a guide to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area out of the first area and the second area;
a guide light emitting means for illuminating a guide light to prompt a player to launch the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting portion of the light emitting means;
and a state control means capable of controlling the game machine to a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state after the control of the advantageous state is completed.
the guidance indication includes a first guidance indication and a second guidance indication that is emphasized less than the first guidance indication,
The display means is
displaying the second guidance display in a first period during a predetermined period in which a start performance for starting control of the advantageous state is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the normal state, displaying the first guidance display and the second guidance display in a second period during the predetermined period that is after the first period, and in the subsequent period, ending the first guidance display while displaying the second guidance display ;
In the special state after the control of the advantageous state is ended, the second guidance display is performed;
when the start performance is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the special state, the first guidance display is not displayed;
when the start performance is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the normal state, the guidance light-emitting means turns off the light-emitting means and then emits the guidance light when executing the first guidance display ;
in both a first situation in which a power outage occurs during the second period while the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being displayed and the power is restored, and a second situation in which a power outage occurs during the period after the predetermined period while the second guidance display is being displayed and the power is restored, a recovery screen during recovery is displayed and then a post-recovery screen after recovery is displayed;
The second guidance display is performed commonly on the during-restoration screen and the after-restoration screen in the first situation and on the during-restoration screen and the after-restoration screen in the second situation.
A gaming machine characterized by: